Relion® 670 SERIES

Line differential protection RED670

Version 2.2
Product guide
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Contents

1. Document revision history.................................................3 15. Logic.....................................................................................47

2. Application.............................................................................4 16. Monitoring......................................................................... 50
3. Available functions..............................................................11 17. Metering..............................................................................53
4. Differential protection......................................................28 18. Human machine interface..............................................53
5. Impedance protection...................................................... 32 19. Basic IED functions.......................................................... 53
6. Wide area measurement system................................... 37 20. Ethernet.............................................................................. 54
7. Current protection.............................................................38 21. Station communication ................................................. 54
8. Voltage protection............................................................ 40 22. Remote communication................................................. 56
9. Frequency protection........................................................41 23. Hardware description......................................................57
10. Multipurpose protection.................................................41 24. Connection diagrams......................................................60
11. General calculation...........................................................42 25. Technical data....................................................................61
12. Secondary system supervision..................................... 42 26. Ordering for customized IED.......................................155
13. Control.................................................................................43 27. Ordering for pre-configured IED................................ 167
14. Scheme communication.................................................45 28. Ordering for Accessories.............................................. 174

Disclaimer

The information in this document is subject to change without notice and should not be construed as a commitment by ABB. ABB assumes no
responsibility for any errors that may appear in this document. Drawings and diagrams are not binding.
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved.

Trademarks

ABB and Relion are registered trademarks of the ABB Group. All other brand or product names mentioned in this document may be trademarks or
registered trademarks of their respective holders.
2 ABB
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2 Issued: May 2019
Revision: J

1. Document revision history GUID-34B323E4-1319-4D42-80CE-29B0F2D36E2C v2

Table 1. Document revision history

Document Date Product revision History

revision

A 2017-07 2.2.0 First release for product version 2.2

B 2017-10 2.2.1 Ethernet ports with RJ45 connector added. enhancements/updates

made to ZMFPDIS and ZMFCPDIS.

C 2018-04 2.2.1 Document enhancements and corrections

D Document not released

E 2018-07 2.2.2 LDCM galvanic X.21 added. Function PTRSTHR added. Ordering section
updated.

F 2018-11 2.2.2 Technical data updated for PSM, EF4PTOC and LxCPDIF . Corrections/
enhancements made to OC4PTOC, TRPTTR, UV2PTUV and OV2PTOV.
Case dimensions updated.

G Document not released

H 2018-12 2.2.3 Functions CHMMHAI, VHMMHAI, DELVSPVC, DELISPVC and DELSPVC,

added. Updates/enhancements made to L4CPDIF, ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS,
CCRBRF, REALCOMP, PTRSTHR and FNKEYMDx. Ordering section
updated.

J 2019-05 2.2.3 PTP enhancements and corrections

ABB 3
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Disturbance recording and fault locator are available to

allow independent post-fault analysis after primary
2. Application M13635-3 v8 disturbances. The Disturbance recorder will also show
The Intelligent Electronic Device (IED) is used for the
remote station currents, as received to this IED, time
protection, control and monitoring of overhead lines
compensated with measure communication time.
and cables in all types of networks. The IED can be used
from distribution up to the highest voltage levels. It is Out of Step function is available to separate power
suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and system sections close to electrical centre at occurring
multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping out of step.
is one-, two-, and/or three-phase. The IED is also
suitable for protection of cable feeders to generator The IED can be used in applications with IEC/UCA
block transformers. 61850-9-2LE process bus with up to eight merging units
(MU) depending on the other functionality included in
The phase segregated current differential protection the IED. Each MU has eight analog channels, four
provides an excellent sensitivity for high resistive faults currents and four voltages. Conventional and Merging
and gives a secure phase selection. The availability of six Unit channels can be mixed freely in the application.
stabilized current inputs per phase allows use on multi-
breaker arrangements in three terminal applications or Forcing of binary inputs and outputs is a convenient way
up to five terminal applications with single breaker to test wiring in substations as well as testing
arrangements. The communication between the IEDs configuration logic in the IEDs. Basically it means that all
involved in the differential scheme is based on the IEEE binary inputs and outputs on the IED I/O modules (BOM,
C37.94 standard and can be duplicated for important BIM, IOM & SOM) can be forced to arbitrary values.
installations when required for redundancy reasons.
Charging current compensation allows high sensitivity Central Account Management is an authentication
also on long overhead lines and cables. infrastructure that offers a secure solution for enforcing
access control to IEDs and other systems within a
A full scheme distance protection is included to provide substation. This incorporates management of user
independent protection in parallel with the differential accounts, roles and certificates and the distribution of
scheme in case of a communication channel failure for such, a procedure completely transparent to the user.
the differential scheme. The distance protection then
provide protection for the entire line including the Flexible Product Naming allows the customer to use an
remote end back up capability either in case of a IED-vendor independent IEC 61850 model of the IED.
communications failure or via use of an independent This customer model will be used as the IEC 61850 data
communication channel to provide a fully redundant model, but all other aspects of the IED will remain
scheme of protection (that is a second main protection unchanged (e.g., names on the local HMI and names in
scheme). Eight channels for intertrip and other binary the tools). This offers significant flexibility to adapt the
signals are available in the communication between the IED to the customers' system and standard solution.
IEDs.
The logic is prepared with a graphical tool. The
A high impedance differential protection can be used to advanced logic capability allows special applications
protect T-feeders or line reactors. such as automatic opening of disconnectors in multi-
breaker arrangements, closing of breaker rings, load
The auto-reclose for single-, two- and/or three phase transfer logics etc. The graphical configuration tool
reclosing includes priority circuits for multi-breaker ensures simple and fast testing and commissioning.
arrangements. It co-operates with the synchronism
check function with high-speed or delayed reclosing. A loop testing function allows complete testing
including remote end IED when local IED is set in test
High set instantaneous phase and earth overcurrent, mode.
four step directional or un-directional delayed phase M11788-3 v10

and earth overcurrent, thermal overload and two step Communication via optical connections ensures
under- and overvoltage functions are examples of the immunity against disturbances.
available functions allowing the user to fulfill any SEMOD51220-5 v14
Four packages have been defined for the following
application requirement.
applications:
The IED can also be provided with a full control and
interlocking functionality including co-operation with
the synchronism check function to allow integration of
the main or backup control.

4 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

• Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (A42) template in the application configuration tool. Analog
• Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends (B33) inputs and binary input/output signals are pre-defined
• Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends (B42) for basic use. Other signals may be required by each
• Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance particular application.
protection (C42)
Add binary I/O boards as required for the application
Optional functions are not configured but a maximum when ordering.
configuration with all optional functions are available as

ABB 5
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Description of configuration A42 GUID-A3E1E81D-9278-4AC1-8AAA-AD0D56DABE23 v1

WA1
RED670 A42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
WA2 12AI (6I+6U)

WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN

WA1_VT VN MMXU

3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SS SCBR
SCBR
S XCBR VN MMXU

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC

26 θ>
REM_CT LC PTTR

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QC9 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI
LINE_VT

27 2(3U<) 27 3U< 59 2(3U>) MET UN MET U

UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV VN MMXU V MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>> 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>)
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC

Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV

Optional Functions

ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f>

CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH

78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control

OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI

67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH

85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000199-2-en.vsd

IEC16000199 V2 EN-US

Figure 1. Configuration diagram for configuration A42

6 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Description of configuration B33 GUID-1231CFD6-8CEF-464E-8124-E9F7EFD0FF62 v1

WA1
RED670 B33 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU

Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD 3 Control
Control
Control
WA1_QA1
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR
REM_CT
71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6
LINE1_QB9 87L 87L 3Id/I>

LINE1_VT LDL PSCH LT3C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 3I>STB

θ>
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR

TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>
LOV PTUV
LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV OV2 PTOV

MET UN
QB62
WA2_VT VN MMXU

MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1 Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P<
CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP

87 Id> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 87L 3Id/I> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos

QB2 HZ PDIF L3C PDIF L6C PDIF LT6C PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM

WA2 Zpsl 78 Ucos 51TF 3 Control 3 Control

PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO

3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> 51V 2(I>/U<) VTHD UTHD

S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VR PVOC VHM MHAI

85 85 85 85
ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF

21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000250-2-en.vsd

IEC16000250 V2 EN-US

Figure 2. Configuration diagram for configuration B33

ABB 7
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Description of configuration B42 GUID-D1058782-6EAD-4E94-8513-1D3647E67250 v1

WA1
RED670 B42 – Multi breaker with single or three phase tripping
12AI (6I+6U)
QB1 WA1_VT

WA1_CT Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD MET UN
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC VN MMXU

Control
Control
Control 50BF 3I>BF 52PD PD

WA1_QA1 REM_CT1 SSSSCBR

SCBR
SCBR CC RBRF CC PDSC 3 Control
Control
Control
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR

REM_CT2 71 63
S SIML S SIMG
WA1_QB6 REM_VT

LINE1_QB9 87L 3Id/I>

LINE1_VT L4C PDIF Σ

MET Usqi MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I<

QB61 V MSQI CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL MET W/Varh

DRP RDRE LMB RFLO ETP MMTR

TIE_QA1 MET Isqi MET I 46 Iub> 50 3I>> 26 3I>STB

θ>
C MSQI C MMXU BRC PTOC PH PIOC LC PTTR

TIE_CT
MET U MET UN 27 3U< 27 3U< 59 3U>

LINE2_VT V MMXU VN MMXU UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV OV2 PTOV

MET UN
QB62 WA2_VT VN MMXU

MET UN 94
94 1→0
1→0 79
79 0→1
5(0→1) 25 SC
25 SC/VC
LINE2_QB9 SMP
VN MMXU SMPPTRC
PTRC SMB
SMBRREC
RREC SES
SESRSYN
RSYN

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 51N_67N 4(IN>) 50N IN>>
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC EF4 PTOC EF PIOC

WA2_QB6 26 Θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 3 Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f>

LF PTTR NS4 PTOC Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF

81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV
WA2_QA1
Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 85 85 32 P> 37 P<
CHM MHAI CV GAPC EC PSCH ECRW PSCH GOP PDOP GUP PDUP

QB2 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos Zpsl 78 Ucos

HZ PDIF OEX PVPH OOS PPAM PMU REP PSL PSCH PSP PPAM
WA2
51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control
PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDE PSDE S XSWI

60 Ud> VTHD UTHD 51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85

VD SPVC VHM MHAI VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH ZCLC PSCH

85 85 21 Z< 68 Zpsb
ZC PSCH ZCRW PSCH ZCV PSOF ZMF PDIS ZM RPSB

IEC16000251-2-en.vsdx

IEC16000251 V2 EN-US

Figure 3. Configuration diagram for configuration B42

8 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Description of configuration C42 GUID-C82DE474-FDC4-49CF-AF12-445716D9C6B6 v1

WA1
RED670 C42 – Single breaker with single or three phase tripping
and back-up distance protection 12AI (6I+6U)
WA2

DFR/SER DR 21FL FL
DRP RDRE LMB RFLO

WA2_VT
QB1 QB2
MET UN

WA1_VT VN MMXU

3 Control
Control
Control MET UN
SSXCBR
S SCBR
SCBR VN MMXU

63 71 94 1→0 79 5(0→1) 25 SC/VC

QA1
S SIMG S SIML SMP PTRC SMB RREC SES RSYN

LINE_CT
Control
Control
Control 52PD PD 50BF 3I>BF 50 3I>> 46 Iub>
SSSSCBR
SCBR
SCBR CC PDSC CC RBRF PH PIOC BRC PTOC

REM_CT 26 θ>
LC PTTR

REM_VT 87L 3Id/I>

QB9 L4C PDIF

MET P/Q 51_67 4(3I>) U>/I< 21 Z<

QC9 CV MMXN OC4 PTOC FUF SPVC ZMF PDIS

MET W/Varh MET I MET Isqi

ETP MMTR C MMXU C MSQI

85 85 50N IN>> 51N_67N 4(IN>)

LINE_VT EC PSCH ECRW PSCH EF PIOC EF4 PTOC

59 2(3U>) 27 2(3U<) 27 3U<

OV2 PTOV UV2 PTUV LOV PTUV

85 85 68 Zpsb
ZCRW PSCH ZC PSCH ZM RPSB ZCV PSOF

MET Usqi MET UN MET U

V MSQI VN MMXU V MMXU

Other Functions available from the function library

87 INd/I 7I DELTAI 7V_78V DELTAU 7 DELTA 26 θ> 46I2 4(I2>) 78 Ucos Zpsl
CCS SPVC DELI SPVC DELV SPVC DEL SPVC LF PTTR NS4 PTOC OOS PPAM PSL PSCH

Control 59N 2(U0>) 81 df/dt<> 81 f> 81 f< 50STB 3I>STB 60 Ud>

Q CBAY ROV2 PTOV SA PFRC SA PTOF SA PTUF STB PTOC VDC PTOV ZCLC PSCH

Optional Functions
ITHD ITHD 2(I>/U<) 32 P> 37 P< 87 Id> 24 U/f> 78 Ucos
CHM MHAI CV GAPC GOP PDOP GUP PDUP HZ PDIF OEX PVPH PMU REP PSP PPAM

51TF 3 Control 3 Control 3 Control 67N IN> 3 Control 60 Ud> VTHD UTHD
PTR STHR Q CRSV S CILO S CSWI SDEPSDE S XSWI VD SPVC VHM MHAI

51V 2(I>/U<) 85 85
VR PVOC ZC1P PSCH ZC1W PSCH

IEC16000252-2-en.vsd

IEC16000252 V2 EN-US

Figure 4. Configuration diagram for configuration C42

ABB 9
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-79B8BC84-4AAB-44E7-86CD-FF63098B009D v3
The basic delivery includes one binary input module and the customer, since these are specific to the system,
one binary output module, which is sufficient for the object or application. Optional functions and optional
default configured I/O to trip and close circuit breaker. I/O ordered will not be configured at delivery. It should
All IEDs can be reconfigured with the help of the be noted that the standard only includes one binary
application configuration tool in PCM600. The IED can input and one binary output module and only the key
be adapted to special applications and special logic can functions such as tripping are connected to the outputs
be developed, such as logic for automatic opening of in the signal matrix tool. The required total I/O must be
disconnectors and closing of ring bays, automatic load calculated and specified at ordering.
transfer from one busbar to the other, and so on.
The configurations are as far as found necessary
The basic IED configuration is provided with the signal provided with application comments to explain why the
matrix, single line diagram and the application signals have been connected in the special way. On
configuration prepared for the functions included in the request, ABB is available to support the re-configuration
product by default. All parameters should be verified by work, either directly or to do the design checking.

10 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

The following tables list all the

3. Available functions functions available in the IED. Those
GUID-F5776DD1-BD04-4872-BB89-A0412B4B5CC3 v1
functions that are not exposed to the
user or do not need to be configured
are not described in this manual.

Main protection functions GUID-66BAAD98-851D-4AAC-B386-B38B57718BD2 v15

Table 2. Example of quantities

2 = number of basic instances

0-3 = option quantities
3-A03 = optional function included in packages A03 (refer to ordering details)

ABB 11
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Differential protection

HZPDIF 87 High impedance differential protection, single 00-03 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02 3-A02
phase

REFPDIF 87N Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance 0–2

L3CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1-A34
ends

L6CPDIF 87L Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A04
ends

LT3CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line 0-1 1
ends, in-zone transformer

LT6CPDIF 87LT Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line 0-1 1-A06
ends, in-zone transformer

L4CPDIF 87L High speed line differential protection for 4 CT 0-1 1 1 1

sets, 2-3 line ends

LDLPSCH 87L Line differential protection logic 0-1 1

LDRGFC 11REL Additional security logic for differential 0-1

protection

Impedance protection

ZMQPDIS, 21 Distance protection zone, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMQAPDIS characteristic

ZDRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral 0-2

ZMCPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMCAPDIS characteristic for series compensated lines

ZDSRDIR 21D Directional impedance quadrilateral, including 0-2

series compensation

FDPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

fixed angle

ZMHPDIS 21 Full-scheme distance protection, mho 0-5

characteristic

ZMMPDIS, 21 Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral 0-5

ZMMAPDIS for earth faults

ZDMRDIR 21D Directional impedance element for mho 0-2

characteristic

ZDARDIR Additional distance protection directional 0-2

function for earth faults

ZSMGAPC Mho impedance supervision logic 0-1

FMPSPDIS 21 Faulty phase identification with load 0-2

enchroachment

12 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

ZMRPDIS, 21 Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic 0-5

ZMRAPDIS separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings

FRPSPDIS 21 Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with 0-2

settable angle

ZMFPDIS 21 High speed distance protection, quad and mho 0-1 1–B15 1–B15 1–B15 1
characteristic

ZMFCPDIS 21 High speed distance protection for series comp. 0-1

lines, quad and mho characteristic

PPLPHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1

PPL2PHIZ Phase preference logic 0-1

ZMRPSB 68 Power swing detection 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1

PSLPSCH Power swing logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1

PSPPPAM 78 Poleslip/out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1-B24

OOSPPAM 78 Out-of-step protection 0-1 1-B22 1-B22 1-B22 1

ZCVPSOF Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
current based

ABB 13
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Back-up protection functions GUID-A8D0852F-807F-4442-8730-E44808E194F0 v15

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Current protection

PHPIOC 50 Instantaneous phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

protection

OC4PTOC 51_671) Directional phase overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

protection, four steps

EFPIOC 50N Instantaneous residual overcurrent 0-1 1 1 1 1

protection

EF4PTOC 51N Directional residual overcurrent 0-3 1 1 1 1

67N2) protection, four steps

NS4PTOC 46I2 Four step directional negative phase 0-2 1 1 1 1

sequence overcurrent protection

SDEPSDE 67N Sensitive directional residual 0-1 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16 1-C16
overcurrent and power protection

LCPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Celsius

LFPTTR 26 Thermal overload protection, one time 0-2 1 1 1 1

constant, Fahrenheit

CCRBRF 50BF Breaker failure protection 0-2 2 1 2 1

STBPTOC 50STB Stub protection 0-2 1B 1 1B 1

1-B27 1-B27

CCPDSC 52PD Pole discordance protection 0-2 2 1 2 1

GUPPDUP 37 Directional underpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35

GOPPDOP 32 Directional overpower protection 0-2 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35

BRCPTOC 46 Broken conductor check 1 1 1 1 1

VRPVOC 51V Voltage restrained overcurrent 0-3 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35 1-C35
protection

Voltage protection

UV2PTUV 27 Two step undervoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1

OV2PTOV 59 Two step overvoltage protection 0-2 1 1 1 1

ROV2PTOV 59N Two step residual overvoltage 0-2 1 1 1 1

protection

OEXPVPH 24 Overexcitation protection 0-1 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03 1-D03

VDCPTOV 60 Voltage differential protection 0-2 2 2 2 2

LOVPTUV 27 Loss of voltage check 1 1 1 1 1

PAPGAPC 27 Radial feeder protection 0-1

14 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Frequency protection

SAPTUF 81 Underfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

SAPTOF 81 Overfrequency protection 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

SAPFRC 81 Rate-of-change of frequency 0-6 1B 1B 1B 1B

protection 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04 3-E04

Multipurpose protection

CVGAPC General current and voltage protection 0-4 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01 4-F01

General calculation

SMAIHPAC Multipurpose filter 0-6

1) 67 requires voltage
2) 67N requires voltage

ABB 15
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Control and monitoring functions GUID-E3777F16-0B76-4157-A3BF-0B6B978863DE v19

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Control

SESRSYN 25 Synchrocheck, 0-2 2 1 2 1

energizing check and
synchronizing

SMBRREC 79 Autorecloser 0-4 2B 1B 2B 1B

2-H05 1-H04 2-H05 1-H04

APC10 3 Control functionality for 0-1 1-H37 1-H37

a single bay, max 10
objects (1CB), including
interlocking (see Table
4)

APC15 3 Control functionality for 0-1 1-H38 1-H38

a single bay, max 15
objects (2CB), including
interlocking (see Table
5)

QCBAY Bay control 1 1 1 1 1

LOCREM Handling of LR-switch 1 1 1 1 1

positions

LOCREMCTRL LHMI control of PSTO 1 1 1 1 1

SXCBR Circuit breaker 6 6 3 6 3

SLGAPC Logic rotating switch 15 15 15 15 15

for function selection
and LHMI presentation

VSGAPC Selector mini switch 30 30 30 30 30

DPGAPC Generic communication 32 32 32 32 32

function for Double
Point indication

SPC8GAPC Single point generic 5 5 5 5 5

control function 8
signals

AUTOBITS Automation bits, 3 3 3 3 3

command function for
DNP3.0

SINGLECMD Single command, 16 8 8 8 8 8

signals

I103CMD Function commands for 1 1 1 1 1

IEC 60870-5-103

I103GENCMD Function commands 50 50 50 50 50

generic for IEC
60870-5-103

16 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

I103POSCMD IED commands with 50 50 50 50 50

position and select for
IEC 60870-5-103

I103POSCMDV IED direct commands 50 50 50 50 50

with position for IEC
60870-5-103

I103IEDCMD IED commands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103

I103USRCMD Function commands 4 4 4 4 4

user defined for IEC
60870-5-103

Secondary
system
supervision

CCSSPVC 87 Current circuit 0-2 2 1 2 1

supervision

FUFSPVC Fuse failure supervision 0-3 3 3 3 3

VDSPVC 60 Fuse failure supervision 0-2 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03 1-G03

based on voltage
difference

DELVSPVC 7V_78 Voltage delta 4 4 4 4 4

V supervision, 2 phase

DELISPVC 71 Current delta 4 4 4 4 4

supervision, 2 phase

DELSPVC 78 Real delta supervision, 4 4 4 4 4

real

Logic

SMPPTRC 94 Tripping logic 12 12 12 12 12

SMAGAPC General start matrix 12 12 12 12 12

block

STARTCOMB Start combinator 32 32 32 32 32

TMAGAPC Trip matrix logic 12 12 12 12 12

ALMCALH Logic for group alarm 5 5 5 5 5

WRNCALH Logic for group warning 5 5 5 5 5

INDCALH Logic for group 5 5 5 5 5

indication

AND, GATE, INV, Basic configurable logic 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420 40-420
LLD, OR, blocks (see Table 3)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET, XOR

ABB 17
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

ANDQT, Configurable logic 0-1

INDCOMBSPQT, blocks Q/T (see Table 6)
INDEXTSPQT,
INVALIDQT,
INVERTERQT,
ORQT,
PULSETIMERQT,
RSMEMORYQT,
SRMEMORYQT,
TIMERSETQT,
XORQT

AND, GATE, INV, Extension logic package 0-1

LLD, OR, (see Table 7)
PULSETIMER,
RSMEMORY,
SLGAPC,
SRMEMORY,
TIMERSET,
VSGAPC, XOR

FXDSIGN Fixed signal function 1 1 1 1 1

block

B16I Boolean to integer 18 18 18 18 18

conversion, 16 bit

BTIGAPC Boolean to integer 16 16 16 16 16

conversion with logical
node representation, 16
bit

IB16 Integer to Boolean 16 18 18 18 18 18

conversion

ITBGAPC Integer to Boolean 16 16 16 16 16 16

conversion with Logic
Node representation

TEIGAPC Elapsed time integrator 12 12 12 12 12

with limit transgression
and overflow
supervision

INTCOMP Comparator for integer 30 30 30 30 30

inputs

REALCOMP Comparator for real 30 30 30 30 30

inputs

18 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 3. Total number of instances for basic configurable logic blocks

Basic configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 280

GATE 40

INV 420

LLD 40

OR 320

PULSETIMER 40

RSMEMORY 40

SRMEMORY 40

TIMERSET 60

XOR 40

Table 4. Number of function instances in APC10

Function name Function description Total number of instances

SCILO Interlocking 10

BB_ES 3

A1A2_BS 2

A1A2_DC 3

ABC_BC 1

BH_CONN 1

BH_LINE_A 1

BH_LINE_B 1

DB_BUS_A 1

DB_BUS_B 1

DB_LINE 1

ABC_LINE 1

AB_TRAFO 1

SCSWI Switch controller 10

SXSWI Circuit switch 9

QCRSV Apparatus control 2

RESIN1 1

RESIN2 59

POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 10

XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 12

GOOSE

GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 12

switching device

ABB 19
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 5. Number of function instances in APC15

Function name Function description Total number of instances

SCILO Interlocking 15

BB_ES 3

A1A2_BS 2

A1A2_DC 3

ABC_BC 1

BH_CONN 1

BH_LINE_A 1

BH_LINE_B 1

DB_BUS_A 1

DB_BUS_B 1

DB_LINE 1

ABC_LINE 1

AB_TRAFO 1

SCSWI Switch controller 15

SXSWI Circuit switch 14

QCRSV Apparatus control 2

RESIN1 1

RESIN2 59

POS_EVAL Evaluation of position indication 15

XLNPROXY Proxy for signals from switching device via 20

GOOSE

GOOSEXLNRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 20

switching device

Table 6. Total number of instances for configurable logic blocks Q/T

Configurable logic blocks Q/T Total number of instances

ANDQT 120

INDCOMBSPQT 20

INDEXTSPQT 20

INVALIDQT 22

INVERTERQT 120

ORQT 120

PULSETIMERQT 40

RSMEMORYQT 40

SRMEMORYQT 40

TIMERSETQT 40

XORQT 40

20 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 7. Total number of instances for extended logic package

Extended configurable logic block Total number of instances

AND 220

GATE 49

INV 220

LLD 49

OR 220

PULSETIMER 89

RSMEMORY 40

SLGAPC 74

SRMEMORY 130

TIMERSET 113

VSGAPC 120

XOR 89

ABB 21
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Monitoring

CVMMXN Power system 6 6 6 6 6

measurement

CMMXU Current measurement 10 10 10 10 10

VMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-phase

CMSQI Current sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement

VMSQI Voltage sequence 6 6 6 6 6

measurement

VNMMXU Voltage measurement 6 6 6 6 6

phase-earth

EVENT Event function 20 20 20 20 20

DRPRDRE, Disturbance report 1 1 1 1 1

A4RADR,

SPGAPC Generic communication 96 96 96 96 96

function for Single Point
indication

SP16GAPC Generic communication 16 16 16 16 16

function for Single Point
indication 16 inputs

MVGAPC Generic communication 24 24 24 24 24

function for measured
values

BINSTATREP Logical signal status 3 3 3 3 3

report

RANGE_XP Measured value expander 66 66 66 66 66

block

SSIMG 63 Insulation supervision for 21 21 21 21 21

gas medium

SSIML 71 Insulation supervision for 3 3 3 3 3

liquid medium

SSCBR Circuit breaker condition 0-6 6 3 6 3

monitoring

LMBRFLO Fault locator 1 1 1 1 1

I103MEAS Measurands for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103

I103MEASUSR Measurands user defined 3 3 3 3 3

signals for IEC
60870-5-103

22 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

I103AR Function status auto- 1 1 1 1 1

recloser for IEC
60870-5-103

I103EF Function status earth- 1 1 1 1 1

fault for IEC 60870-5-103

I103FLTPROT Function status fault 1 1 1 1 1

protection for IEC
60870-5-103

I103IED IED status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103

I103SUPERV Supervison status for IEC 1 1 1 1 1

60870-5-103

I103USRDEF Status for user defined 20 20 20 20 20

signals for IEC
60870-5-103

L4UFCNT Event counter with limit 30 30 30 30 30

supervision

TEILGAPC Running hour meter 6 6 6 6 6

PTRSTHR 51TF Through fault monitoring 0-2 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22 2-M22

CHMMHAI ITHD Current harmonic 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3

monitoring, 3 phase

VHMMHAI VTHD Voltage harmonic 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3 0-3

monitoring, 3 phase

Metering

PCFCNT Pulse-counter logic 16 16 16 16 16

ETPMMTR Function for energy 6 6 6 6 6

calculation and demand
handling

ABB 23
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Communication GUID-5F144B53-B9A7-4173-80CF-CD4C84579CB5 v17

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

Station communication

LONSPA, SPA SPA communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

ADE LON communication protocol 1 1 1 1 1

HORZCOMM Network variables via LON 1 1 1 1 1

DNPGEN DNP3.0 communication general protocol 1 1 1 1 1

MST1TCP, MST2TCP, DNP3.0 for TCP/IP communication 1 1 1 1 1

MST3TCP, MST4TCP protocol

IEC 61850-8-1 IEC 61850 1 1 1 1 1

GOOSEINTLKRCV Horizontal communication via GOOSE for 59 59 59 59 59

interlocking

GOOSEBINRCV GOOSE binary receive 16 16 16 16 16

GOOSEDPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 64 64 64 64 64

double point value

GOOSEINTRCV GOOSE function block to receive an 32 32 32 32 32

integer value

GOOSEMVRCV GOOSE function block to receive a 60 60 60 60 60

measurand value

GOOSESPRCV GOOSE function block to receive a single 64 64 64 64 64

point value

MULTICMDRCV, Multiple command and transmit 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10 60/10
MULTICMDSND

OPTICAL103 IEC 60870-5-103 Optical serial 1 1 1 1 1

communication

RS485103 IEC 60870-5-103 serial communication 1 1 1 1 1

for RS485

AGSAL Generic security application component 1 1 1 1 1

LD0LLN0 IEC 61850 LD0 LLN0 1 1 1 1 1

SYSLLN0 IEC 61850 SYS LLN0 1 1 1 1 1

LPHD Physical device information 1 1 1 1 1

PCMACCS IED configuration protocol 1 1 1 1 1

FSTACCS Field service tool access 1 1 1 1 1

IEC 61850-9-2 Process bus 0-1 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30 1-P30

communication, 8 merging units

ACTIVLOG Activity logging 1 1 1 1 1

ALTRK Service tracking 1 1 1 1 1

PRP IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 0-1 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23 1-P23

24 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

HSR IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless 0-1 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24 1-P24
redundancy

PMUCONF, Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors (see 0-1 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32 1-P32
PMUREPORT, Table 8)
PHASORREPORT1,
ANALOGREPORT1
BINARYREPORT1,
SMAI1 - SMAI12
3PHSUM
PMUSTATUS

PTP Precision time protocol 1 1 1 1 1

SCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for non- 6 6 6 6 6

redundant Ethernet port

RCHLCCH Access point diagnostic for redundant 3 3 3 3 3

Ethernet ports

QUALEXP IEC 61850 quality expander 96 96 96 96 96

Remote communication

BinSignRec1_1 Binary signal transfer receive 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignRec1_2
BinSignReceive2

BinSignTrans1_1 Binary signal transfer transmit 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6 3/3/6
BinSignTrans1_2
BinSignTransm2

BinSigRec1_12M Binary signal transfer, 2Mbit receive/ 3 3 3 3 3

BinSigRec1_22M transmit
BinSigTran1_12M
BinSigTran1_22M

LDCMTRN Transmission of analog data from LDCM 1 1 1 1 1

LDCMTRN_2M Transmission of analog data from LDCM, 6 6 6 6 6

2Mbit

LDCMRecBinStat1 Receive binary status from remote LDCM 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3 6/3/3
LDCMRecBinStat2
LDCMRecBinStat3

LDCMRecBinS2_2M Receive binary status from LDCM, 2Mbit 3 3 3 3 3

LDCMRecBinS3_2M Receive binary status from remote 3 3 3 3 3

LDCM, 2Mbit

Scheme communication

ZCPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic with delta 0-2 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
based blocking scheme signal transmit

ZC1PPSCH 85 Phase segregated scheme 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05

communication logic for distance
protection

ZCRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-2 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1
logic for distance protection

ABB 25
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850 or ANSI Function description Line Differential

function name

RED670 (C42)
RED670 (A42)

RED670 (B42)
RED670 (B33)
RED670
(Customized)

ZC1WPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-2 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05 1-B05
logic for phase segregated
communication

ZCLCPSCH Local acceleration logic 0-1 1-B15 1-B15 1-B15 1

ECPSCH 85 Scheme communication logic for 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1

residual overcurrent protection

ECRWPSCH 85 Current reversal and weak-end infeed 0-1 1-C34 1-C34 1-C34 1
logic for residual overcurrent protection

DTT Direct transfer trip 0-1

Table 8. Number of function instances in Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors

Function name Function description Number of instances

PMUCONF Configuration parameters for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

PMUREPORT Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 1

PHASORREPORT1 Protocol reporting of phasor data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, phasors 1-8 1

ANALOGREPORT1 Protocol reporting of analog data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, analogs 1-8 1

BINARYREPORT1 Protocol reporting of binary data via IEEE 1344 and C37.118, binary 1-8 1

SMAI1–SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs 1

3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase 6

PMUSTATUS Diagnostics for C37.118 2011 and IEEE1344 protocol 1

26 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Basic IED functions GUID-C8F0E5D2-E305-4184-9627-F6B5864216CA v13

Table 9. Basic IED functions

IEC 61850 or function Description

name

INTERRSIG Self supervision with internal event list

TIMESYNCHGEN Time synchronization module

BININPUT, SYNCHCAN, Time synchronization

SYNCHGPS,
SYNCHCMPPS,
SYNCHLON,
SYNCHPPH, SYNCHPPS,
SNTP, SYNCHSPA

TIMEZONE Time synchronization

IRIG-B Time synchronization

SETGRPS Number of setting groups

ACTVGRP Parameter setting groups

TESTMODE Test mode functionality

CHNGLCK Change lock function

SMBI Signal matrix for binary inputs

SMBO Signal matrix for binary outputs

SMMI Signal matrix for mA inputs

SMAI1 - SMAI12 Signal matrix for analog inputs

3PHSUM Summation block 3 phase

ATHSTAT Authority status

ATHCHCK Authority check

AUTHMAN Authority management

FTPACCS FTP access with password

ALTMS Time master supervision

ALTIM Time management

COMSTATUS Protocol diagnostic

ABB 27
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 10. Local HMI functions

IEC 61850 or function ANSI Description

name

LHMICTRL Local HMI signals

LANGUAGE Local human machine language

SCREEN Local HMI Local human machine screen behavior

FNKEYTY1–FNKEYTY5 Parameter setting function for HMI in PCM600

FNKEYMD1–FNKEYMD5

LEDGEN General LED indication part for LHMI

OPENCLOSE_LED LHMI LEDs for open and close keys

GRP1_LED1– Basic part for CP HW LED indication module

GRP1_LED15
GRP2_LED1–
GRP2_LED15
GRP3_LED1–
GRP3_LED15

The REFPDIF function is a percentage biased function

with an additional zero sequence current directional
4. Differential protection
comparison criterion. This gives excellent sensitivity and
stability during through faults.
High impedance differential protection, single phase
REFPDIF can also protect autotransformers. Five
HZPDIF M13071-3 v13
currents are measured at the most complicated
High impedance differential protection, single phase
configuration as shown in Figure 5.
(HZPDIF) functions can be used when the involved CT
cores have the same turns ratio and similar magnetizing CT CT
characteristics. It utilizes an external CT secondary YNdx
CT CB CB
current summation by wiring. Actually all CT secondary Y d
circuits which are involved in the differential scheme are CB CB

connected in parallel. External series resistor, and a Autotransformer

CT
voltage dependent resistor which are both mounted IED

externally to the IED, are also required.

The external resistor unit shall be ordered under IED The most typical
application
CT CB CB CT

accessories in the Product Guide. The most complicated

application - autotransformer

HZPDIF can be used to protect tee-feeders or busbars,

IEC05000058-2-en.vsd

IEC05000058-2 V1 EN-US

reactors, motors, auto-transformers, capacitor banks Figure 5. Examples of applications of the REFPDIF
and so on. One such function block is used for a high-
impedance restricted earth fault protection. Three such
function blocks are used to form three-phase, phase-
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets,
segregated differential protection.
2-3 line ends L4CPDIF GUID-57872A74-462D-4513-B75B-A46ADCE03522 v2
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3
Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance
line ends (L4CPDIF) is a unit type protection system with
REFPDIF M13047-3 v19
typical operate time less than one cycle. These types of
Restricted earth-fault protection, low-impedance
systems are suitable for the protection of complex
function (REFPDIF) can be used on all directly or low-
transmission network configurations because they
impedance earthed windings. The REFPDIF function
exhibit good performance during evolving, inter-circuit,
provides high sensitivity and high speed tripping as it
and cross-country faults. They are also highly immune to
protects each winding separately and thus does not
power swings, mutual coupling and series impedance
need inrush stabilization.
28 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

unbalances. High speed line differential protection IEDs. Then L4CPDIF compares these currents using a
requires 2 Mbit/s communication channel to transfer classical current differential principle supplemented by
analog signals. an additional advanced internal fault detector. This
results in fast protection with very high dependability
The L4CPDIF function applies the Kirchhoff's law, and (relay operates correctly with faults it was designed for)
compares currents entering and leaving the protected and very high security (relay does not operate with
multi-end circuit consisting of overhead power lines and faults it was not designed for).
cables. Under normal load conditions, the sum of
currents is small or close to zero. The function is phase- Line differential protection, 3 or 6 CT sets L3CPDIF,
segregated: each phase has its own differential, bias L6CPDIF M14917-3 v7
and incremental currents. Line differential protection applies the Kirchhoff's law
and compares the currents entering and leaving the
L4CPDIF measures currents at all ends of a protected protected multi-terminal circuit, consisting of overhead
circuit. At each physical end, currents are mostly power lines and cables. Under the condition that there
measured by one and sometimes by two three-phase are no in-line or tap (shunt) power transformers within
current transformer (CT) groups. The voltages at all the zone of protection, it offers a phase segregated
ends are also measured if the exact method is selected fundamental frequency current based differential
for charging current compensation. The protected zone protection with high sensitivity and provides phase
is determined by the positions of the CTs at all ends of selection information for single-pole tripping
the protected circuit. L4CPDIF protects all electrical
equipment, such as power lines, circuit breakers and L3CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with
small tap transformers, that are within the protected or without a 1½ circuit breaker arrangement in one end,
zone. as well as three-terminal lines with single breaker
arrangements at all terminals.
The information on all locally measured currents is
transmitted via communication channels to remote

Protected zone

IED Communication channel IED

IEC05000039-3-en.vsd
IEC05000039 V3 EN-US

Figure 6. Example of application on a conventional two-terminal line

L6CPDIF is used for conventional two-terminal lines with

1½ circuit breaker arrangements in both ends, as well as
multi-terminal lines with up to five terminals.

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000040_2_en.vsd
IEC05000040 V2 EN-US

Figure 7. Example of application on a three-terminal line with 1½ breaker arrangements

The current differential algorithm provides high are exchanged between the IEDs in the line ends
sensitivity for internal faults and it has excellent (master-master mode) or sent to one IED (master-slave
stability for external faults. Current samples from all CTs mode) for evaluation.
ABB 29
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

A restrained dual biased slope evaluation is made where handled. The normal load current is considered to be
the bias current is the highest phase current in any line negligible, and special measures must be taken in the
end, giving a secure through-fault stability even with event of a short circuit on the LV side of the
heavily saturated CTs. In addition to the restrained transformer. In this application, the tripping of the
evaluation, an unrestrained (instantaneous) high differential protection can be time-delayed for low
differential current setting can be used for fast tripping differential currents to achieve coordination with
of internal faults with very high currents. downstream overcurrent IEDs. The local protection of
the small tap power transformer is given the time
A special feature with this function is that applications needed to disconnect the faulty transformer.
with small power transformers (rated current less than
50% of the differential current setting IdMin ) connected A line charging current compensation provides
as line taps (that is, as shunt power transformers), increased sensitivity of line differential protection.
without measurements of currents in the tap, can be

and three-winding transformers are correctly

Line differential protection 3 or 6 CT sets, with in- represented with vector group compensations made in
zone transformers LT3CPDIF , LT6CPDIF M14932-3 v9 the algorithm. The function includes 2nd and 5 th
Two two-winding power transformers or one three-
harmonic restraint and zero-sequence current
winding power transformer can be included in the line
elimination. The phase-segregated differential
differential protection zone. In such application, the
protection with single-pole tripping is usually not
differential protection is based on the ampere turns
possible in such applications.
balance between the transformer windings. Both two-

Protected zone

IED Comm. Channel IED

Comm. Channel Comm. Channel

IED

IEC05000042_2_en.vsd
IEC05000042 V2 EN-US

Figure 8. Example of application on a three-terminal line with an in-line power transformer in the protection zone

setting Operation for the differential function is set to

Analog signal transfer for line differential protection M13647-3 v8 Off.
The line differential protection function can be arranged
as a master-master system or a master-slave system
alternatively. In the former, current samples are For line differential protection we
exchanged between all IEDs, and an evaluation is made recommend that all feeder ends use the
in each IED. This means that a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s same version of RED670 and the line
communication channel is needed between every IED data communication module LDCM.
included in the same line differential protection zone. In The line differential protection in the
the latter, current samples are sent from all slave IEDs to latest version of RED670 is compatible
one master IED where the evaluation is made, and trip with older versions of RED670. Older
signals are sent to the remote ends when needed. In this versions than 670 1.2.3 must be verified
system, a 64 kbits/s or 2 Mbit/s communication channel with ABB.
is only needed between the master and each one of the
slave IEDs. The Master-Slave condition for the
differential function appears automatically when the

30 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Protected zone

IED IED

Comm.
Channels

IED IED IED

IEC0500043_2_en.vsd
IEC05000043 V2 EN-US

Figure 9. Five terminal lines with master-master system

Protected zone

RED RED
670 670

Comm.
Channels

RED RED RED

670 670 670

en05000044.vsd
IEC05000044 V1 EN-US

Figure 10. Five terminal line with master-slave system

Current samples from IEDs located geographically apart The communication link is continuously monitored, and
from each other, must be time coordinated so that the an automatic switchover to a standby link is possible
current differential algorithm can be executed correctly, after a preset time.
this is done with the echo method. For applications
where transmit and receive times can differ, the
optional built-in GPS receivers can be used.

the sampling value based algorithm. Phase-to-phase

Additional security logic for differential protection current variation function is major one to fulfill the
LDRGFC GUID-8F918A08-E50E-4E7B-BDCA-FF0B5534B289 v3 objectives of the startup element.
Additional security logic for differential protection
(LDRGFC) can help the security of the protection Zero sequence criterion takes the zero sequence current
especially when the communication system is in as input. It increases the security of protection during
abnormal status or for example when there is the high impedance fault conditions.
unspecified asymmetry in the communication link. It
helps to reduce the probability for mal-operation of the Low voltage criterion takes the phase voltages and
protection. LDRGFC is more sensitive than the main phase-to-phase voltages as inputs. It increases the
protection logic to always release operation for all faults security of protection when the three-phase fault
detected by the differential function. LDRGFC consists occurred on the weak end side.
of four sub functions:
Low current criterion takes the phase currents as inputs
• Phase-to-phase current variation and it increases the dependability during the switch
• Zero sequence current criterion onto fault case of unloaded line.
• Low voltage criterion
The differential function can be allowed to trip as no
• Low current criterion
load is fed through the line and protection is not
Phase-to-phase current variation takes the current working correctly.
samples as input and it calculates the variation using
Features:
ABB 31
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

• Startup element is sensitive enough to detect the • It is possible to block the each sub function of startup
abnormal status of the protected system element
• Startup element does not influence the operation • Startup signal has a settable pulse time
speed of main protection
• Startup element would detect the evolving faults, high
impedance faults and three phase fault on weak side

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents

overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase-
5. Impedance protection
to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines.
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral
The distance protection zones can operate
characteristic ZMQPDIS, ZMQAPDIS M13787-3 v15
independently of each other in directional (forward or
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending
reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them
on product variant) zone full scheme protection function
suitable, together with different communication
with three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and
schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
three fault loops for phase-to-earth faults for each of
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines,
the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
multi-terminal lines.
in resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use as
back-up protection for transformer connected to Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths. characteristic for series compensated lines
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic
ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS SEMOD168173-4 v11
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending
(ZMQPDIS) together with Phase selection with load
on product variant) zone full scheme protection with
encroachment (FDPSPDIS) has functionality for load
three fault loops for phase-to-phase faults and three
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect
fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each of the
high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines, as shown in
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
figure 11.
resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use on
overhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
X
Quadrilateral characteristic is available.

Forward Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic

operation for series compensated lines (ZMCPDIS) function has
functionality for load encroachment which increases the
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily
loaded lines.

Reverse
operation

en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 11. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with

Phase selection with load encroachment function
FDPSPDIS activated

The independent measurement of impedance for each

fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in
phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single-phase autoreclosing.

32 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

built-in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives

X the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both
the phase selection and the measuring zones without
Forward interfering with the load.
operation
The extensive output signals from the phase selection
gives also important information about faulty phase(s),
which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The

R measuring elements continuously measure three phase
currents and the residual current and, compare them
with the set values.
Reverse
operation
Full-scheme distance measuring, Mho characteristic
ZMHPDIS SEMOD175459-4 v12
The numerical mho line distance protection is an up to
en05000034.vsd five (depending on product variant) zone full scheme
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US protection of short circuit and earth faults.
Figure 12. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with
load encroachment function activated The zones have fully independent measuring and
settings, which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.

The independent measurement of impedance for each The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is
fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in suitable for the protection of heavily loaded lines and
phase selection makes the function suitable in multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping
applications with single phase auto-reclosing. is one-, two- and/or three-pole.

Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the The independent measurement of impedance for each
quadrilateral function prevents overreaching of zone1 at fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable phase
load exporting end at phase to earth-faults on heavily selection makes the function suitable in applications
loaded power lines. with single phase autoreclosing.

The distance protection zones can operate, independent Built-in selectable zone timer logic is also provided in
of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- the function.
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
with different communication schemes, for the Adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
protection of power lines and cables in complex network overreaching at phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal power lines, see Figure 13.
lines.
jX
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
fixed angle FDPSPDIS M13139-3 v9
The operation of transmission networks today is in
many cases close to the stability limit. Due to Operation area Operation area
environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
reinforcement of the power system is reduced, for
example, difficulties to get permission to build new
R
power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping Operation area
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
this matter. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic
No operation area No operation area
with fixed angle (FDPSPDIS) is designed to accurately
select the proper fault loop in the distance function IEC07000117-2-en.vsd
dependent on the fault type. IEC07000117 V2 EN-US

Figure 13. Load encroachment influence on the offset mho

The heavy load transfer that is common in many characteristic
transmission networks may make fault resistance
coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, FDPSPDIS has a
ABB 33
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

The distance protection zones can operate, independent The independent measurement of impedance for each
of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built in
directional mode (offset). This makes them suitable, phase selection makes the function suitable in
together with different communication schemes, for the applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
protection of power lines and cables in complex network
configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal The distance protection zones can operate, independent
lines and so on. of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non-
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together
The possibility to use the phase-to-earth quadrilateral with different communication schemes, for the
impedance characteristic together with the mho protection of power lines and cables in complex network
characteristic increases the possibility to overcome configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal
eventual lack of sensitivity of the mho element due to lines.
the shaping of the curve at remote end faults.
Directional impedance element for Mho
The integrated control and monitoring functions offer characteristic ZDMRDIR SEMOD175532-4 v2
effective solutions for operating and monitoring all The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be
types of transmission and sub-transmission lines. optionally supervised by a phase unselective directional
function (phase unselective, because it is based on
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for symmetrical components).
earth faults ZMMPDIS, ZMMAPDIS SEMOD154544-4 v7
The line distance protection is an up to five (depending Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC SEMOD153843-5 v3
on product variant) zone full scheme protection function The Mho impedance supervision logic (ZSMGAPC)
with three fault loops for phase-to-earth fault for each includes features for fault inception detection and high
of the independent zones. Individual settings for each SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss
zone resistive and reactive reach give flexibility for use of potential logic as well as for the pilot channel
on overhead lines and cables of different types and blocking scheme.
lengths.
ZSMGAPC can mainly be decomposed in two different
The Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for parts:
earth fault functions have functionality for load
encroachment, which increases the possibility to detect 1. A fault inception detection logic
high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines , see Figure 2. High SIR detection logic
14.
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment
FMPSPDIS
X SEMOD153825-5 v7
The ability to accurately and reliably classify different
types of fault so that single phase tripping and
Forward autoreclosing can be used plays an important roll in
operation today's power systems.

The phase selection function is design to accurately

select the proper fault loop(s) in the distance function
dependent on the fault type.
R
The heavy load transfer that is common in many
transmission networks may in some cases interfere with
Reverse the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted
operation operation. Therefore the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the
possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the
measuring zones without interfering with the load.
en05000034.vsd
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US
The output signals from the phase selection function
Figure 14. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
produce important information about faulty phase(s),
settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated which can be used for fault analysis as well.

34 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal

Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic lines and so on.
separate Ph-Ph and Ph-E settings ZMRPDIS,
ZMRAPDIS GUID-014501E7-EE0D-440F-8DC8-C44B848E49D3 v3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with
The line distance protection is up to five zone full settable angle FRPSPDIS GUID-09D0E480-C003-424E-BECD-A82BCB0052CD v1
scheme protection with three fault loops for phase-to- The operation of transmission networks today is in
phase faults and three fault loops for phase-to-earth many cases close to the stability limit. Due to
fault for each of the independent zones. Individual environmental considerations, the rate of expansion and
settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach reinforcement of the power system is reduced for
gives flexibility for use as back-up protection for example, difficulties to get permission to build new
transformer connected to overhead lines and cables of power lines. The ability to accurately and reliably classify
different types and lengths. the different types of fault, so that single pole tripping
and autoreclosing can be used plays an important role in
Mho alternative quadrilateral characteristic is available. this matter. The phase selection function is designed to
accurately select the proper fault loop in the distance
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic
function dependent on the fault type.
(ZMRPDIS) together with Phase selection, quadrilateral
characteristic with settable angle (FRPSPDIS) has The heavy load transfer that is common in many
functionality for load encroachment, which increases the transmission networks may make fault resistance
possibility to detect high resistive faults on heavily coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore, the function has
loaded lines, as shown in figure 15. a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives
the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of both
the phase selection and the measuring zones without
X
interfering with the load.

Forward The extensive output signals from the phase selection

operation gives also important information about faulty phase(s)
which can be used for fault analysis.

A current-based phase selection is also included. The

measuring elements continuously measure three phase
currents and the residual current and, compare them
R
with the set values.

Reverse High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and

operation mho ZMFPDIS GUID-2E34AB7F-886E-499F-8984-09041A89238D v8
The high speed distance protection (ZMFPDIS) provides
a sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate time. Its
six zone, full scheme protection concept is entirely
en05000034.vsd suitable in applications with single-phase autoreclosing.
IEC05000034 V1 EN-US

Figure 15. Typical quadrilateral distance protection zone with

Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility
settable angle function FRPSPDIS activated
to operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic
mode. This can even be decided separate for the phase-
The independent measurement of impedance for each to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can
fault loop together with a sensitive and reliable built-in operate either independent of each other, or their start
phase selection makes the function suitable in can be linked (per zone) through the phase selector or
applications with single pole tripping and autoreclosing. the first starting zone. This can provide fast operate
times for evolving faults.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm prevents
overreaching of zone 1 at load exporting end at phase- The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based
to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines. on a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),
however there is also a phase selection criterion
The distance protection zones can operate, independent operating in parallel which bases its operation on
of each other, in directional (forward or reverse) or non- voltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally the
directional mode. This makes them suitable, together directional element provides a fast and correct
with different communication schemes, for the directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
protection of power lines and cables in complex network including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous
ABB 35
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed. During M13873-3 v12

phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power lines Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy
there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm that loads or trip of big generation plants.
prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the load
Power swing detection function (ZMRPSB ) is used to
exporting end, improving the selectivity of the function.
detect power swings and initiate block of all distance
This also reduces underreach in the importing end.
protection zones. Occurrence of earth-fault currents
High speed distance protection for series comp. during a power swing inhibits the ZMRPSB function, to
lines, quad and mho characteristic ZMFCPDIS allow fault clearance.
GUID-C5C1ADD8-50A5-4485-848C-77D2222B56DC v8
The high speed distance protection (ZMFCPDIS)
Power swing logic PSLPSCH
provides a sub-cycle, down towards a half-cycle operate SEMOD131350-4 v4
Power Swing Logic (PSLPSCH) is a complementary
time. Its six zone, full scheme protection concept is
function to Power Swing Detection (ZMRPSB) function.
entirely suitable in applications with single-phase
It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on
autoreclosing.
power lines during system oscillations (power swings or
High speed distance protection ZMFCPDIS is pole slips), when the distance protection function
fundamentally the same function as ZMFPDIS but should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists
provides more flexibility in zone settings to suit more of two different parts:
complex applications, such as series compensated lines.
• Communication and tripping part: provides selective
In operation for series compensated networks, the
tripping on the basis of special distance protection
parameters of the directional function are altered to
zones and a scheme communication logic, which are
handle voltage reversal.
not blocked during the system oscillations.
Each measurement zone is designed with the flexibility • Blocking part: blocks unwanted operation of
to operate in either quadrilateral or mho characteristic instantaneous distance protection zone 1 for
mode. This can even be decided separate for the phase- oscillations, which are initiated by faults and their
to-ground or phase-to-phase loops. The six zones can clearing on the adjacent power lines and other primary
operate either independent of each other, or their start elements.
can be linked (per zone) through the phase selector or
the first starting zone. This can provide fast operate Pole slip protection PSPPPAM SEMOD143246-17 v7
times for evolving faults. Sudden events in an electric power system such as large
changes in load, fault occurrence or fault clearance, can
The operation of the phase-selection is primarily based
cause power oscillations referred to as power swings. In
on a current change criteria (i.e. delta quantities),
a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become
however there is also a phase selection criterion
so severe that the synchronism is lost, a condition
operating in parallel which bases its operation on
referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
voltage and current phasors exclusively. Additionally the
pole slip protection (PSPPPAM) is to detect, evaluate,
directional element provides a fast and correct
and take the required action for pole slipping
directional decision under difficult operating conditions,
occurrences in the power system.
including close-in three-phase faults, simultaneous
faults and faults with only zero-sequence in-feed. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM GUID-BF2F7D4C-F579-4EBD-9AFC-7C03296BD5D4 v8
The out-of-step protection (OOSPPAM ) function in the
During phase-to-earth faults on heavily loaded power
IED can be used for both generator protection and as
lines there is an adaptive load compensation algorithm
well for line protection applications.
that prevents overreaching of the distance zones in the
load exporting end, improving the selectivity of the The main purpose of the OOSPPAM function is to detect,
function. This also reduces underreach in the importing evaluate, and take the required action during pole
end. slipping occurrences in the power system.

The ZMFCPDIS function has another directional element The OOSPPAM function detects pole slip conditions and
with phase segregated outputs STTDFwLx and trips the generator as fast as possible, after the first
STTDRVLx (where, x = 1-3) based on the transient pole-slip if the center of oscillation is found to be in
components. It provides directionality with high speed, zone 1, which normally includes the generator and its
dependability and security, which is also suitable for step-up power transformer. If the center of oscillation is
extra high voltage and series compensated lines where found to be further out in the power system, in zone 2,
the fundamental frequency signals are distorted. more than one pole-slip is usually allowed before the
generator-transformer unit is disconnected. A
Power swing detection ZMRPSB parameter setting is available to take into account the

36 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

circuit breaker opening time. If there are several out-of-

step relays in the power system, then the one which Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and
finds the center of oscillation in its zone 1 should current based ZCVPSOF M13829-3 v4

operate first. Automatic switch onto fault logic (ZCVPSOF) is a

function that gives an instantaneous trip at closing of
Two current channels I3P1 and I3P2 are available in breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is
OOSPPAM function to allow the direct connection of two provided to activate the function when the line is dead.
groups of three-phase currents; that may be needed for
very powerful generators, with stator windings split into
two groups per phase, when each group is equipped
with current transformers. The protection function 6. Wide area measurement system
performs a simple summation of the currents of the two
channels I3P1 and I3P2.
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors GUID-7539462D-A3D6-492D-9926-E67C5B7C72D9 v1

Configuration parameters for IEEE1344 and C37.118

Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ SEMOD153619-5 v3
protocol PMUCONF
The optional phase preference logic (PPLPHIZ) is used GUID-33694C62-A109-4D8F-9063-CEFA5D0E78BC v4
The IED supports the following IEEE synchrophasor
with the ZMQPDIS and FDPSPDIS distance protection.
standards:
The main purpose of this function is to provide a
• IEEE 1344-1995 (Both measurements and data
selective tripping for cross-country faults in isolated or
communication)
high impedance-earthed networks.
• IEEE Std C37.118-2005 (Both measurements and data
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ communication)
GUID-39785DEB-E5D7-447C-977B-9E940CA8E774 v1
The Phase preference logic function (PPL2PHIZ) is used • IEEE Std C37.118.1–2011 and C37.118.1a-2014
with the high speed distance protection, quad and mho (Measurements)
characteristic (ZMFPDIS). It is intended to be used in • IEEE Std C37.118.2-2011 (Data communication)
isolated or high impedance earthed networks where
there is a requirement to operate on only one of the PMUCONF contains the PMU configuration parameters
faulty lines during a cross-country fault. It can be used for both IEEE C37.118 and IEEE 1344 protocols. This
without preference to restrain operation for single earth means all the required settings and parameters in order
faults with a delayed zero-sequence current release. to establish and define a number of TCP and/or UDP
connections with one or more PDC clients
For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the
(synchrophasor client). This includes port numbers,
leading or lagging phase-earth loop for measurement. It
TCP/UDP IP addresses, and specific settings for IEEE
initiates operation on the preferred fault based on the
C37.118 as well as IEEE 1344 protocols.
selected phase preference. A number of different phase
preference combinations are available for selection. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118
PMUREPORT
PPL2PHIZ provides an additional phase selection GUID-8DF29209-252A-4E51-9F4A-B14B669E71AB v4
The phasor measurement reporting block moves the
criteria, namely under voltage criteria, suitable for
phasor calculations into an IEEE C37.118 and/or IEEE
cross-country faults. In radial networks, where there is
1344 synchrophasor frame format. The PMUREPORT
no fault current in the phase with the external fault,
block contains parameters for PMU performance class
current or impedance based phase selection methods
and reporting rate, the IDCODE and Global PMU ID,
become ineffective. Hence, only voltage can be used for
format of the data streamed through the protocol, the
phase selection. The phase selection result will be the
type of reported synchrophasors, as well as settings for
same for all bays on a bus since the voltage is the same,
reporting analog and digital signals.
which is an important condition for operating with
phase preference. The message generated by the PMUREPORT function
block is set in accordance with the IEEE C37.118 and/or
In meshed and stronger networks, it is difficult to find
IEEE 1344 standards.
appropriate under-voltage or phase selection settings. If
PPL2PHIZ is unable to detect both faulty phases, then it There are settings for Phasor type (positive sequence,
is not possible to provide preference. The distance negative sequence or zero sequence in case of 3-phase
protection will still be released however, without phasor and L1, L2 or L3 in case of single phase phasor),
preference. The final result might be that both faulty PMU's Service class (Protection or Measurement),
feeders are operated. In other words, operation is Phasor representation (polar or rectangular) and the
prioritized over strict adherence to preference. data types for phasor data, analog data and frequency
data.

ABB 37
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Synchrophasor data can be reported to up to 8 clients protection being out of service due to communication or
over TCP and/or 6 UDP group clients for multicast or voltage transformer circuit failure.
unicast transmission of phasor data from the IED. More
information regarding synchrophasor communication EF4PTOC has an inverse or definite time delay
structure and TCP/UDP configuration is available in independent for each step.
Application Manual under section C37.118 Phasor
All IEC and ANSI time-delayed characteristics are
Measurement Data Streaming Protocol Configuration.
available together with an optional user-defined
Multiple PMU functionality can be configured in the IED, characteristic.
which can stream out same or different data at different
EF4PTOC can be set to be directional or non-directional
reporting rates or different performance (service)
independently for each step.
classes.
IDir, UPol and IPol can be independently selected to be
either zero sequence or negative sequence.

7. Current protection A second harmonic blocking can be set individually for

each step.
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC M12910-3 v14
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent (PHPIOC) Directional operation can be combined together with
function has a low transient overreach and short the corresponding communication logic in permissive or
tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit blocking teleprotection scheme. The current reversal
protection function. and weak-end infeed functionality are available as well.

Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps The residual current can be calculated by summing the
OC4PTOC M12846-3 v17
three-phase currents or taking the input from the
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps neutral CT.
(OC4PTOC) has an inverse or definite time delay for each
step. Four step directional negative phase sequence
overcurrent protection NS4PTOC GUID-485E9D36-0032-4559-9204-101539A32F47 v6
All IEC and ANSI inverse time characteristics are Four step directional negative phase sequence
available together with an optional user defined time overcurrent protection (NS4PTOC) has an inverse or
characteristic. definite time delay independent for each step
separately.
The directional function needs voltage as it is voltage
polarized with memory. The function can be set to be All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are
directional or non-directional independently for each of available together with an optional user defined
the steps. characteristic.

A second harmonic blocking level can be set for the The directional function is voltage polarized.
function and can be used to block each step individually.
NS4PTOC can be set directional or non-directional
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection independently for each of the steps.
EFPIOC
The Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection
M12701-3 v16
NS4PTOC can be used as main protection for
(EFPIOC) has a low transient overreach and short unsymmetrical fault; phase-phase short circuits, phase-
tripping times to allow the use for instantaneous earth- phase-earth short circuits and single phase earth faults.
fault protection, with the reach limited to less than the
NS4PTOC can also be used to provide a system backup
typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source
for example, in the case of the primary protection being
impedance. EFPIOC is configured to measure the
out of service due to communication or voltage
residual current from the three-phase current inputs and
transformer circuit failure.
can be configured to measure the current from a
separate current input. Directional operation can be combined together with
corresponding communication logic in permissive or
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four
blocking teleprotection scheme. The same logic as for
steps EF4PTOC M13667-3 v19 directional zero sequence current can be used. Current
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps
reversal and weak-end infeed functionality are available.
(EF4PTOC) can be used as main protection for phase-to-
earth faults. It can also be used to provide a system
back-up, for example, in the case of the primary
38 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

1. By external start signals which is internally latched

Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power 2. Follow external start signal only
protection SDEPSDE SEMOD171438-5 v6 3. Follow external start signal and the selected
In isolated networks or in networks with high impedance FunctionMode
earthing, the earth fault current is significantly smaller
than the short circuit currents. In addition to this, the
magnitude of the fault current is almost independent on CCRBRF can be single- or three- phase initiated to allow
the fault location in the network. The protection can be its use with single phase tripping applications. For the
selected to use either the residual current or residual three-phase application of the CCRBRF the current
power component 3U0·3I0·cos j, for operating quantity criteria can be set to operate only if “2 elements
with maintained short circuit capacity. There is also operates out of three phases and neutral” for example;
available one nondirectional 3I0 step and one 3U0 two phases or one phase plus the residual current start.
overvoltage tripping step. This gives a higher security to the backup trip command.

No specific sensitive current input is needed. Sensitive The CCRBRF function can be programmed to give a
directional residual overcurrent and power protection single- or three- phase retrip to its own breaker to avoid
(SDEPSDE) can be set as low 0.25% of IBase. unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an
incorrect initiation due to mistakes during testing.
Thermal overload protection, one time constant
LCPTTR/LFPTTR Stub protection STBPTOC M12902-3 v10
M12020-4 v14
The increasing utilization of the power system closer to When a power line is taken out of service for
the thermal limits has generated a need of a thermal maintenance and the line disconnector is opened in
overload protection for power lines. multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers
will mostly be outside on the disconnected part. The
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other primary line distance protection will thus not be able to
protection functions and the introduction of the thermal operate and must be blocked.
overload protection can allow the protected circuit to
operate closer to the thermal limits. The stub protection (STBPTOC) covers the zone between
the current transformers and the open disconnector.
The three-phase current measuring protection has an I 2 t The three-phase instantaneous overcurrent function is
characteristic with settable time constant and a thermal released from a normally open, NO (b) auxiliary contact
memory. The temperature is displayed in either Celsius on the line disconnector.
or Fahrenheit, depending on whether the function used
is Thermal overload protection (LCPTTR) (Celsius) or Pole discordance protection CCPDSC M13269-3 v15

(LFPTTR) (Fahrenheit). An open phase can cause negative and zero sequence
currents which cause thermal stress on rotating
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to machines and can cause unwanted operation of zero
take action well before the line is tripped. sequence or negative sequence current functions.

Estimated time to trip before operation, and estimated Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct such a
time to reclose after operation are presented. situation. If the situation persists the surrounding
breakers should be tripped to clear the unsymmetrical
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF M11550-6 v18
load situation.
Breaker failure protection (CCRBRF) ensures a fast
backup tripping of the surrounding breakers in case the The Pole discordance protection function (CCPDSC)
own breaker fails to open. CCRBRF measurement operates based on information from auxiliary contacts
criterion can be current based, CB position based or an of the circuit breaker for the three phases with
adaptive combination of these two conditions. additional criteria from unsymmetrical phase currents
when required.
A current based check with extremely short reset time is
used as check criterion to achieve high security against Directional over/underpower protection GOPPDOP/
inadvertent operation. GUPPDUP SEMOD175421-4 v7
The directional over-/under-power protection
CB position check criteria can be used where the fault (GOPPDOP/GUPPDUP) can be used wherever a high/low
current through the breaker is small. active, reactive or apparent power protection or
alarming is required. The functions can alternatively be
CCRBRF provides three different options to select how
used to check the direction of active or reactive power
t1 and t2 timers are run:
flow in the power system. There are a number of

ABB 39
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

applications where such functionality is needed. Some triggered, the function will cause an alarm, switch in
of them are: reactors, or switch out capacitor banks.

• detection of reversed active power flow OV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each of them with
• detection of high reactive power flow inverse or definite time delayed.

Each function has two steps with definite time delay. OV2PTOV has a high reset ratio to allow settings close
to system service voltage.
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC SEMOD171446-5 v2
The main purpose of the function Broken conductor Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV M13808-3 v11
check (BRCPTOC) is the detection of broken conductors Residual voltages may occur in the power system during
on protected power lines and cables (series faults). earth faults.
Detection can be used to give alarm only or trip the line
breaker. Two step residual overvoltage protection (ROV2PTOV)
function calculates the residual voltage from the three-
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection phase voltage input transformers or measures it from a
VRPVOC GUID-935E1CE8-601F-40E2-8D22-2FF68420FADF v6
single voltage input transformer fed from an open delta
Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection or neutral point voltage transformer.
(VRPVOC) function can be used as generator backup
protection against short-circuits. ROV2PTOV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or
definite time delay.
The overcurrent protection feature has a settable
current level that can be used either with definite time A reset delay ensures operation for intermittent earth
or inverse time characteristic. Additionally, it can be faults.
voltage controlled/restrained.
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH M13319-3 v9

One undervoltage step with definite time characteristic When the laminated core of a power transformer or
is also available within the function in order to provide generator is subjected to a magnetic flux density
functionality for overcurrent protection with beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-
undervoltage seal-in. laminated components that are not designed to carry
flux. This will cause eddy currents to flow. These eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe
damage to insulation and adjacent parts in a relatively
8. Voltage protection short time. The function has settable inverse operating
curves and independent alarm stages.
Two-step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV
M13789-3 v12
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during SEMOD153862-5 v7

faults or abnormal conditions. The two-step A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It
undervoltage protection function (UV2PTUV) can be compares the voltages from two three phase sets of
used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step
restoration at power outages or as a long-time delayed and one trip step.
back-up to the primary protection.
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV SEMOD171457-5 v8

UV2PTUV has two voltage steps, each with inverse or Loss of voltage check (LOVPTUV ) is suitable for use in
definite time delay. networks with an automatic system restoration
function. LOVPTUV issues a three-pole trip command to
It has a high reset ratio to allow settings close to the the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below
system service voltage. the set value for a time longer than the set time and the
circuit breaker remains closed.
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV M13798-3 v16
Overvoltages may occur in the power system during The operation of LOVPTUV is supervised by the fuse
abnormal conditions such as sudden power loss, tap failure supervision FUFSPVC.
changer regulating failures, and open line ends on long
lines. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC GUID-82856D0B-5C5E-499A-9A62-CC511E4F047A v3
The radial feeder protection (PAPGAPC) function is used
Two step overvoltage protection (OV2PTOV) function to provide protection of radial feeders having passive
can be used to detect open line ends, normally then loads or weak end in-feed sources. It is possible to
combined with a directional reactive over-power achieve fast tripping using communication system with
function to supervise the system voltage. When remote end or delayed tripping not requiring

40 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

communication or upon communication system failure. M14953-3 v12

For fast tripping, scheme communication is required. Overfrequency protection function (SAPTOF) is
Delayed tripping does not require scheme applicable in all situations, where reliable detection of
communication. high fundamental power system frequency is needed.

The PAPGAPC function performs phase selection using Overfrequency occurs because of sudden load drops or
measured voltages. Each phase voltage is compared to shunt faults in the power network. Close to the
the opposite phase-phase voltage. A phase is deemed to generating plant, generator governor problems can also
have a fault if its phase voltage drops below a settable cause over frequency.
percentage of the opposite phase-phase voltage. The
SAPTOF measures frequency with high accuracy, and is
phase - phase voltages include memory. This memory
used mainly for generation shedding and remedial
function has a settable time constant.
action schemes. It is also used as a frequency stage
The voltage-based phase selection is used for both fast initiating load restoring. A definite time delay is
and delayed tripping. To achieve fast tripping, scheme provided for operate.
communication is required. Delayed tripping does not
SAPTOF is provided with an undervoltage blocking.
require scheme communication. It is possible to permit
delayed tripping only upon failure of the The operation is based on positive sequence voltage
communications channel by blocking the delayed measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
tripping logic with a communications channel healthy phase-neutral voltages to be connected.
input signal.
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC M14965-3 v14
On receipt of the communications signal, phase The rate-of-change of frequency protection function
selective outputs for fast tripping are set based on the (SAPFRC) gives an early indication of a main disturbance
phase(s) in which the phase selection function has in the system. SAPFRC measures frequency with high
operated. accuracy, and can be used for generation shedding, load
shedding and remedial action schemes. SAPFRC can
For delayed tripping, single pole and three pole delays
discriminate between a positive or negative change of
are separately and independently settable. Furthermore,
frequency. A definite time delay is provided for operate.
it is possible to enable or disable single pole and three
pole delayed tripping. For single phase faults, it is SAPFRC is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The
possible to include a residual current check in the operation is based on positive sequence voltage
tripping logic. Three pole tripping is always selected for measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
phase selection on more than one phase. Three pole phase-neutral voltages to be connected.
tripping will also occur if the residual current exceeds
the set level during fuse failure for a time longer than
the three pole trip delay time.
10. Multipurpose protection

General current and voltage protection CVGAPC M13083-11 v9

9. Frequency protection The General current and voltage protection (CVGAPC)

can be utilized as a negative sequence current
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF M13349-3 v13
protection detecting unsymmetrical conditions such as
Underfrequency occurs as a result of a lack of open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
generation in the network.
CVGAPC can also be used to improve phase selection for
Underfrequency protection (SAPTUF) measures high resistive earth faults, outside the distance
frequency with high accuracy, and is used for load protection reach, for the transmission line. Three
shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas turbine functions are used, which measures the neutral current
startup and so on. Separate definite time delays are and each of the three phase voltages. This will give an
provided for operate and restore. independence from load currents and this phase
selection will be used in conjunction with the detection
SAPTUF is provided with undervoltage blocking.
of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
The operation is based on positive sequence voltage protection function.
measurement and requires two phase-phase or three
phase-neutral voltages to be connected.

Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

ABB 41
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage

measurements can be added to the fuse failure
11. General calculation
supervision function in order to detect a three phase
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC fuse failure, which in practice is more associated with
GUID-EB0B11C3-FF79-4B8D-A335-649623E832F9 v3
The multi-purpose filter function block (SMAIHPAC) is voltage transformer switching during station
arranged as a three-phase filter. It has very much the operations.
same user interface (e.g. inputs and outputs) as the
standard pre-processing function block SMAI. However
Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC GUID-6AF2219A-264F-4971-8D03-3B8A9D0CB284 v5
Different protection functions within the protection IED
the main difference is that it can be used to extract any
operates on the basis of measured voltage at the relay
frequency component from the input signal. Thus it can,
point. Some example of protection functions are:
for example, be used to build sub-synchronous
resonance protection for synchronous generator. • Distance protection function.
• Undervoltage function.
• Energisation function and voltage check for the weak
infeed logic.
12. Secondary system supervision
These functions can operate unintentionally, if a fault
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC M12444-3 v10 occurs in the secondary circuits between voltage
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can
instrument transformers and the IED. These
cause unwanted operation of many protection functions
unintentional operations can be prevented by fuse
such as differential, earth-fault current and negative-
failure supervision (VDSPVC).
sequence current functions.
VDSPVC is designed to detect fuse failures or faults in
Current circuit supervision (CCSSPVC) compares the
voltage measurement circuit, based on phase wise
residual current from a three phase set of current
comparison of voltages of main and pilot fused circuits.
transformer cores with the neutral point current on a
VDSPVC blocking output can be configured to block
separate input taken from another set of cores on the
functions that need to be blocked in case of faults in the
current transformer.
voltage circuit.
A detection of a difference indicates a fault in the circuit
Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC
and is used as alarm or to block protection functions GUID-6188C4C1-E1D5-421A-B496-96676287EBB2 v2
Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect
expected to give inadvertent tripping.
(sudden) changes in the network. This can, for example,
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC be used to detect faults in the power system networks
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function
SEMOD113820-4 v12
and islanding in grid networks. Voltage based delta
(FUFSPVC) is to block voltage measuring functions at supervision (DELVSPVC) is needed at the grid
failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage interconnection point.
transformer and the IED in order to avoid inadvertent
Current based delta supervision DELISPVC
operations that otherwise might occur. GUID-30A00AE0-8D3A-4CE8-9379-8D1A0A6078E3 v2
Delta supervision function is used to quickly detect
The fuse failure supervision function basically has three (sudden) changes in the network. This can, for example,
different detection methods, negative sequence and be used to detect disturbances in the power system
zero sequence based detection and an additional delta network. Current based delta supervision (DELISPVC)
voltage and delta current detection. provides selectivity between load change and the fault.

The negative sequence detection algorithm is Present power system has many power electronic
recommended for IEDs used in isolated or high- devices or FACTS devices, which injects a large number
impedance earthed networks. It is based on the of harmonics into the system. The function has
negative-sequence quantities. additional features of 2nd harmonic blocking and 3 rd
harmonic start level adaption. The 2 nd harmonic blocking
The zero sequence detection is recommended for IEDs secures the operation during the transformer charging,
used in directly or low impedance earthed networks. It is when high inrush currents are supplied into the system.
based on the zero sequence measuring quantities.
Delta supervision of real input DELSPVC
GUID-8FAD2CCF-091F-4CDB-8ABF-1BDC874A8403 v2
The selection of different operation modes is possible Delta supervision functions are used to quickly detect
by a setting parameter in order to take into account the (sudden) changes in the power system. Real input delta
particular earthing of the network. supervision (DELSPVC) function is a general delta

42 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

function. It is used to detect the change measured Several auto reclosing functions can be provided for
qualities over a settable time period, such as: multi-breaker arrangements. A priority circuit allows one
• Power circuit breaker to reclose first and the second will only
• Reactive power close if the fault proved to be transient.
• Temperature
• Frequency Each auto reclosing function can be configured to co-
• Power factor operate with the synchrocheck function.

Apparatus control APC M13444-3 v15

The apparatus control functions are used for control and
supervision of circuit breakers, disconnectors and
13. Control earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is
given after evaluation of conditions from other
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck, operator
SESRSYN M12480-3 v16
place selection and external or internal blockings.
The Synchronizing function allows closing of
asynchronous networks at the correct moment including
The complete apparatus control
the breaker closing time, which improves the network function is not included in this product,
stability. and the information below is included
for understanding of the principle for
Synchrocheck, energizing check, and synchronizing
the use of QCBAY, LOCREM, and
(SESRSYN) function checks that the voltages on both
LOCREMCTRL.
sides of the circuit breaker are in synchronism, or with
at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be
done safely. Apparatus control features:
• Select-Execute principle to give high reliability
SESRSYN function includes a built-in voltage selection • Selection function to prevent simultaneous operation
scheme for double bus and 1½ breaker or ring busbar • Selection and supervision of operator place
arrangements. • Command supervision
• Block/deblock of operation
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be • Block/deblock of updating of position indications
checked by the function and can have different settings. • Substitution of position and quality indications
• Overriding of interlocking functions
For systems, which can run asynchronously, a
• Overriding of synchrocheck
synchronizing feature is also provided. The main
• Operation counter
purpose of the synchronizing feature is to provide
• Suppression of mid position
controlled closing of circuit breakers when two
asynchronous systems are in phase and can be
connected. The synchronizing feature evaluates voltage Two types of command models can be used:
difference, phase angle difference, slip frequency and • Direct with normal security
frequency rate of change before issuing a controlled • SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security
closing of the circuit breaker. Breaker closing time is a
setting.
Normal security means that only the command is
Autorecloser SMBRREC evaluated and the resulting position is not supervised.
The auto recloser (SMBRREC) function provides:
M12390-3 v17
Enhanced security means that the command is
• high-speed and/or delayed auto reclosing evaluated with an additional supervision of the status
• single and/or three phase auto reclosing value of the control object. The command sequence with
• support for single or multi-breaker applications. enhanced security is always terminated by a
CommandTermination service primitive and an
AddCause telling if the command was successful or if
The auto recloser can be used for delayed busbar something went wrong.
restoration.
Control operation can be performed from the local HMI
Up to five reclosing shots can be performed. The first with authority control if so defined.
shot can be single-, two-, and /or three-phase
depending on the type of the fault and the selected auto Interlocking M13531-3 v4
reclosing mode. The interlocking function blocks the possibility to
operate primary switching devices, for instance when a

ABB 43
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material M13447-3 v8

damage and/or accidental human injury. The Bay control (QCBAY) function is used together with
Local remote and local remote control functions to
Each apparatus control function has interlocking handle the selection of the operator place per bay.
modules included for different switchyard QCBAY also provides blocking functions that can be
arrangements, where each function handles interlocking distributed to different apparatuses within the bay.
of one bay. The interlocking function is distributed to
each IED and is not dependent on any central function. Proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
For the station-wide interlocking, the IEDs communicate XLNPROXY GUID-11F9CA1C-8E20-489B-822B-34DACC59553A v1

via the system-wide interbay bus (IEC 61850-8-1) or by The proxy for signals from switching device via GOOSE
using hard wired binary inputs/outputs. The (XLNPROXY) gives an internal representation of the
interlocking conditions depend on the circuit position status and control response for a switch
configuration and apparatus position status at any modelled in a breaker IED. This representation is
given time. identical to that of an SXCBR or SXSWI function.

For easy and safe implementation of the interlocking GOOSE function block to receive a switching device
function, the IED is delivered with standardized and GOOSEXLNRCV GUID-5AC7DE11-CB95-4565-A8AE-FB23D59FD717 v1

tested software interlocking modules containing logic The GOOSE XLN Receive component is used to collect
for the interlocking conditions. The interlocking information from another device’s XCBR/XSWI logical
conditions can be altered, to meet the customer’s node sent over process bus via GOOSE. The GOOSE XLN
specific requirements, by adding configurable logic by Receive component includes 12 different outputs (and
means of the graphical configuration tool. their respective channel valid bits) with defined names
to ease the 61850 mapping of the GOOSE signals in the
Switch controller SCSWI M13486-3 v10
configuration process.
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises
all functions to properly select and operate switching Local remote LOCREM/Local remote control
primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle LOCREMCTRL M17086-3 v11

and operate on one multi-phase device or up to three The signals from the local HMI or from an external local/
one-phase devices. remote switch are connected via the function blocks
local remote (LOCREM) and local remote control
Circuit breaker SXCBR M13489-3 v6
(LOCREMCTRL) to the Bay control (QCBAY) function
The purpose of Circuit breaker (SXCBR) is to provide the block. The parameter ControlMode in function block
actual status of positions and to perform the control LOCREM is set to choose if the switch signals are
operations, that is, pass all the commands to primary coming from the local HMI or from an external hardware
apparatuses in the form of circuit breakers via binary switch connected via binary inputs.
output boards and to supervise the switching operation
and position. Logic rotating switch for function selection and
LHMI presentation SLGAPC SEMOD114908-4 v11

Circuit switch SXSWI M16492-3 v6

The logic rotating switch for function selection and
The purpose of Circuit switch (SXSWI) function is to LHMI presentation (SLGAPC) (or the selector switch
provide the actual status of positions and to perform function block) is used to get an enhanced selector
the control operations, that is, pass all the commands to switch functionality compared to the one provided by a
primary apparatuses in the form of disconnectors or hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches
earthing switches via binary output boards and to are used extensively by utilities, in order to have
supervise the switching operation and position. different functions operating on pre-set values.
Hardware switches are however sources for
Reservation function QCRSV M13506-3 v5
maintenance issues, lower system reliability and an
The purpose of the reservation (QCRSV) function is extended purchase portfolio. The selector switch
primarily to transfer interlocking information between function eliminates all these problems.
IEDs in a safe way and to prevent double operation in a
bay, switchyard part, or complete substation. Selector mini switch VSGAPC SEMOD158756-5 v10
The Selector mini switch (VSGAPC) function block is a
Reservation input RESIN M16501-3 v5
multipurpose function used for a variety of applications,
The Reservation input (RESIN) function receives the as a general purpose switch.
reservation information from other bays. The number of
instances is the same as the number of involved bays VSGAPC can be controlled from the menu, from a symbol
(up to 60 instances are available). on the single line diagram (SLD) on the local HMI or from
Binary inputs.
Bay control QCBAY
44 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

permissive underreach, permissive overreach and

Generic communication function for Double Point blocking schemes are available. To manage problems
indication DPGAPC SEMOD55850-5 v7 with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase
Generic communication function for Double Point segregated communication is needed. This will then
indication (DPGAPC) function block is used to send replace the standard Scheme communication logic for
double point position indications to other systems, distance or Overcurrent protection (ZCPSCH) on
equipment or functions in the substation through IEC important lines where three communication channels (in
61850-8-1 or other communication protocols. It is each subsystem) are available for the distance
especially intended to be used in the interlocking protection communication.
station-wide logics.
The main purpose of the Phase segregated scheme
Single point generic control 8 signals SPC8GAPC SEMOD176462-4 v11 communication logic for distance protection
The Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GAPC) (ZC1PPSCH) function is to supplement the distance
function block is a collection of 8 single point protection function such that:
commands that can be used for direct commands for
example reset of LEDs or putting IED in "ChangeLock" • fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end
state from remote. In this way, simple commands can be for which the faults are on the part of the line not
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. covered by its underreaching zone.
Confirmation (status) of the result of the commands is • correct phase selection can be maintained to support
supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary single-pole tripping for faults occurring anywhere on
inputs and SPGAPC function blocks. The commands can the entire length of a double circuit line.
be pulsed or steady with a settable pulse time.
To accomplish this, three separate communication
Automation bits, command function for DNP3.0 channels, that is, one per phase, each capable of
AUTOBITS SEMOD158591-5 v8
transmitting a signal in each direction is required.
Automation bits function for DNP3 (AUTOBITS) is used
within PCM600 to get into the configuration of the ZC1PPSCH can be completed with the current reversal
commands coming through the DNP3 protocol. The and WEI logic for phase segregated communication,
AUTOBITS function plays the same role as functions when found necessary in Blocking and Permissive
GOOSEBINRCV (for IEC 61850) and MULTICMDRCV (for overreaching schemes.
LON).
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
Single command, 16 signals distance protection ZCRWPSCH M13896-3 v15
The ZCRWPSCH function provides the current reversal
M12446-6 v5
The IEDs can receive commands either from a
substation automation system or from the local HMI. and weak end infeed logic functions that supplement
The command function block has outputs that can be the standard scheme communication logic. It is not
used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses suitable for standalone use as it requires inputs from
or for other user defined functionality. the distance protection functions and the scheme
communications function included within the terminal.

On detection of a current reversal, the current reversal

logic provides an output to block the sending of the
14. Scheme communication
teleprotection signal to the remote end, and to block
Scheme communication logic with delta based the permissive tripping at the local end. This blocking
blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH condition is maintained long enough to ensure that no
M13860-3 v11
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line unwanted operation will occur as a result of the current
faults, scheme communication logic is provided. All reversal.
types of communication schemes for permissive
On verification of a weak end infeed condition, the weak
underreaching, permissive overreaching, blocking, delta
end infeed logic provides an output for sending the
based blocking, unblocking and intertrip are available.
received teleprotection signal back to the remote
The built-in communication module (LDCM) can be used sending end and other output(s) for local tripping. For
for scheme communication signaling when included. terminals equipped for single- and two-pole tripping,
outputs for the faulted phase(s) are provided.
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for Undervoltage detectors are used to detect the faulted
distance protection ZC1PPSCH SEMOD141686-4 v3
phase(s).
Communication between line ends is used to achieve
fault clearance for all faults on a power line. All possible
types of communication schemes for example,
ABB 45
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

supplement to Scheme communication logic for residual

Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase overcurrent protection ECPSCH.
segregated communication ZC1WPSCH SEMOD156473-5 v3
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the
segregated communication (ZC1WPSCH) function is line, the directional earth fault protection function can
used to prevent unwanted operations due to current be supported with logic that uses tele-protection
reversal when using permissive overreach protection channels.
schemes in application with parallel lines where the
overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel This is why the IEDs have available additions to the
line. scheme communication logic.
M13928-6 v2

The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the If parallel lines are connected to common busbars at
apparent power behind the protection can be too low to both terminals, overreaching permissive communication
activate the distance protection function. When schemes can trip unselectively due to fault current
activated, received carrier signal together with local reversal. This unwanted tripping affects the healthy line
undervoltage criteria and no reverse zone operation when a fault is cleared on the other line. This lack of
gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also security can result in a total loss of interconnection
echoed back to accelerate the sending end. between the two buses. To avoid this type of
disturbance, a fault current reversal logic (transient
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH M13823-3 v7
blocking logic) can be used.
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when M13928-8 v5

no communication channel is available, local Permissive communication schemes for residual

acceleration logic (ZCLCPSCH) can be used. This logic overcurrent protection can basically operate only when
enables fast fault clearing and re-closing during certain the protection in the remote IED can detect the fault.
conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a The detection requires a sufficient minimum residual
communication channel. fault current, out from this IED. The fault current can be
too low due to an opened breaker or high-positive
The logic can be controlled either by the autorecloser and/or zero-sequence source impedance behind this
(zone extension) or by the loss-of-load current (loss-of- IED. To overcome these conditions, weak-end infeed
load acceleration). (WEI) echo logic is used. The weak-end infeed echo is
limited to 200 ms to avoid channel lockup.
Scheme communication logic for residual
overcurrent protection ECPSCH M13918-4 v11
Direct transfer trip DTT
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC
GUID-25A2A94F-09FE-4552-89F8-CF22632A7A0D v2
part of the line not covered by the instantaneous step of
the residual overcurrent protection, the directional Low active power and power factor protection
residual overcurrent protection can be supported with a (LAPPGAPC) function measures power flow. It can be
logic that uses communication channels. used for protection and monitoring of:

In the directional scheme, information of the fault • phase wise low active power
current direction must be transmitted to the other line • phase wise low power factor
end. With directional comparison, a short operate time • phase wise reactive power and apparent power as
of the protection including a channel transmission time, service values
can be achieved. This short operate time enables rapid
Following features are available:
autoreclosing function after the fault clearance.
• Definite time stage for low active power protection
The communication logic module for directional residual
• Definite time stage for low power factor protection
current protection enables blocking as well as
• Individual enabling of Low active power and Low
permissive under/overreaching, and unblocking
power factor functions
schemes. The logic can also be supported by additional
• Low active power trip with 2 selection modes '1 out of
logic for weak-end infeed and current reversal, included
3' and '2 out of 3'
in Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
• Phase wise calculated values of apparent power,
residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) function.
reactive power, active power and power factor are
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for available as service values
residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH • Insensitive to small variations in voltage and current
M13928-3 v8
The Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for
residual overcurrent protection (ECRWPSCH) is a

46 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Compensated over and undervoltage protection Features:

COUVGAPC
GUID-229EB419-0903-46FA-9192-BBB35725C841 v2
Compensated over and undervoltage protection • Phase wise start and trip signals
(COUVGAPC) function calculates the remote end voltage • Overcurrent protection
of the transmission line utilizing local measured voltage, • Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
current and with the help of transmission line • Single definite time stage trip function.
parameters, that is, line resistance, reactance,
Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC
capacitance and local shunt reactor. For protection of GUID-E8EA5CE8-ED7A-4FA3-9DAC-83227D53387F v3
Three phase undercurrent function (LCP3PTUC) is
long transmission line for in zone faults, COUVGAPCcan
designed for detecting loss of load conditions.
be incorporated with local criteria within direct transfer
trip logic to ensure tripping of the line only under Features:
abnormal conditions.
• Phase wise start and trip signals
Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC • Phase wise RMS current is available as service values
GUID-413851A9-5EB7-4C48-8F5D-E30E470EFFAF v2
Sudden change in current variation (SCCVPTOC) • Single definite time stage trip function
function is a fast way of finding any abnormality in line
currents. When there is a fault in the system, the current
changes faster than the voltage. SCCVPTOC finds
abnormal condition based on phase-to-phase current
variation. The main application is as a local criterion to 15. Logic
increase security when transfer trips are used.
Tripping logic SMPPTRC M12275-3 v14

Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC A function block for protection tripping and general
GUID-79AB9B9E-9200-44D7-B4EE-57C9E7BB74A9 v2
In Direct transfer trip (DTT) scheme, the received CR start indication is always provided as a basic function
signal gives the trip to the circuit breaker after checking for each circuit breaker. It provides a settable pulse
certain local criteria functions in order to increase the prolongation time to ensure a trip pulse of sufficient
security of the overall tripping functionality. Carrier length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct
receive logic (LCCRPTRC) function gives final trip output co-operation with autoreclosing functions.
of the DTT scheme.
The trip function block includes a settable latch function
Features: for the trip signal and circuit breaker lockout.

• Carrier redundancy to ensure security in DTT scheme The trip function can collect start and directional signals
• Blocking function output on CR Channel Error from different application functions. The aggregated
• Phase wise trip outputs start and directional signals are mapped to the IEC
61850 logical node data model.
Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV
General start matrix block SMAGAPC
GUID-C5CBB6A2-780D-4008-98E3-455A404D32CB v2
Negative sequence components are present in all types GUID-BA516165-96DE-4CD9-979B-29457C7653C0 v3

of fault condition. Negative sequence voltage and The Start Matrix (SMAGAPC) merges start and
current get high values during unsymmetrical faults. directional output signals from different application
functions and creates a common start and directional
Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV output signal (STDIR) to be connected to the Trip
GUID-4CF3EC6A-D286-4808-929B-C9302418E4ED v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal function.
conditions involving earth. They can reach considerably
high values during earth faults. The purpose of this functionality is to provide general
start and directional information for the IEC 61850 trip
Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC logic data model SMPPTRC.
GUID-C4F99554-88BC-4F11-9EFE-91BCA6ED1261 v2
Negative sequence components are present in all types
of fault condition. They can reach considerably high Trip matrix logic TMAGAPC M15321-3 v13

values during abnormal operation. The trip matrix logic (TMAGAPC) function is used to
route trip signals and other logical output signals to
Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC different output contacts on the IED.
GUID-F0C38DA1-2F39-46DE-AFFE-F919E6CF4A57 v2
Zero sequence components are present in all abnormal
conditions involving earth. They have a considerably The trip matrix logic function has 3 output signals and
high value during earth faults. these outputs can be connected to physical tripping
outputs according to the specific application needs for
Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC settable pulse or steady output.
GUID-AC4FF35E-5D86-421E-82C7-93F600E9F453 v2
Three phase overcurrent (LCP3PTOC) is designed for
overcurrent conditions.
ABB 47
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

before the power interruption. RESET input has

Group alarm logic function ALMCALH GUID-16E60E27-F7A8-416D-8648-8174AAC49BB5 v4 priority.
The group alarm logic function (ALMCALH) is used to
route several alarm signals to a common indication, LED • SRMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can set or
and/or contact, in the IED. reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
Group warning logic function WRNCALH
GUID-F7D9A012-3AD4-4D86-BE97-DF2A99BE5383 v4 memory setting controls if, after a power interruption,
The group warning logic function (WRNCALH) is used to the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had
route several warning signals to a common indication, before the power interruption. The SET input has
LED and/or contact, in the IED. priority.
Group indication logic function INDCALH
GUID-D8D1A4EE-A87F-46C6-8529-277FC1ADA9B0 v4 • TIMERSET function has pick-up and drop-out delayed
The group indication logic function (INDCALH) is used to outputs related to the input signal. The timer has a
route several indication signals to a common indication, settable time delay.
LED and/or contact, in the IED.
• XOR is used to generate combinatory expressions
Basic configurable logic blocks M11396-4 v18 with boolean variables. XOR has two inputs and two
The basic configurable logic blocks do not propagate outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. The output
the time stamp and quality of signals (have no suffix QT signal OUT is 1 if the input signals are different and 0
at the end of their function name). A number of logic if they are the same.
blocks and timers are always available as basic for the
user to adapt the configuration to the specific
application needs. The list below shows a summary of Configurable logic blocks Q/T GUID-0CA6511A-E8BD-416E-9B59-5C6BD98C60B7 v5

the function blocks and their features. The configurable logic blocks QT propagate the time
stamp and the quality of the input signals (have suffix
These logic blocks are also available as part of an QT at the end of their function name).
extension logic package.
The function blocks assist the user to adapt the IEDs'
• AND function block. The AND function is used to form configuration to the specific application needs. The list
general combinatory expressions with boolean below shows a summary of the function blocks and their
variables. The AND function block has up to four features.
inputs and two outputs. One of the outputs is
inverted. • ANDQT AND function block. The function also
propagates the time stamp and the quality of input
• GATE function block is used for whether or not a signals. Each block has four inputs and two outputs
signal should be able to pass from the input to the where one is inverted.
output.
• INDCOMBSPQT combines single input signals to group
• INVERTER function block that inverts the input signal signal. Single position input is copied to value part of
to the output. SP_OUT output. TIME input is copied to time part of
SP_OUT output. Quality input bits are copied to the
• LLD function block. Loop delay used to delay the corresponding quality part of SP_OUT output.
output signal one execution cycle.
• INDEXTSPQT extracts individual signals from a group
• OR function block. The OR function is used to form signal input. The value part of single position input is
general combinatory expressions with boolean copied to SI_OUT output. The time part of single
variables. The OR function block has up to six inputs position input is copied to TIME output. The quality
and two outputs. One of the outputs is inverted. bits in the common part and the indication part of
inputs signal are copied to the corresponding quality
• PULSETIMER function block can be used, for example,
output.
for pulse extensions or limiting of operation of
outputs, settable pulse time. • INVALIDQT function which sets quality invalid of
outputs according to a "valid" input. Inputs are copied
• RSMEMORY function block is a flip-flop that can reset
to outputs. If input VALID is 0, or if its quality invalid
or set an output from two inputs respectively. Each
bit is set, all outputs invalid quality bit will be set to
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
invalid. The time stamp of an output will be set to the
memory setting controls if, after a power interruption,
latest time stamp of INPUT and VALID inputs.
the flip-flop resets or returns to the state it had

48 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

• INVERTERQT function block that inverts the input GUID-2D64874A-F266-4251-8EED-E813F40513D7 v3

signal and propagates the time stamp and the quality The Elapsed time integrator function (TEIGAPC) is a
of the input signal. function that accumulates the elapsed time when a
given binary signal has been high.
• ORQT OR function block that also propagates the time
stamp and the quality of the input signals. Each block The main features of TEIGAPC
has six inputs and two outputs where one is inverted.
• Applicable to long time integration (≤999 999.9
• PULSETIMERQT Pulse timer function block can be seconds).
used, for example, for pulse extensions or limiting of • Supervision of limit transgression conditions and
operation of outputs. The function also propagates overflow.
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal. • Possibility to define a warning or alarm with the
resolution of 10 milliseconds.
• RSMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can • Retaining of the integration value.
reset or set an output from two inputs respectively. • Possibilities for blocking and reset.
Each block has two outputs where one is inverted. The • Reporting of the integrated time.
memory setting controls if the block after a power
interruption should return to the state before the
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit B16I
interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates SEMOD175725-4 v5
Boolean to integer conversion, 16 bit (B16I) is used to
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
transform a set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an
• SRMEMORYQT function block is a flip-flop that can set integer.
or reset an output from two inputs respectively. Each
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node
block has two outputs where one is inverted. The
representation, 16 bit BTIGAPC
memory setting controls if the block after a power SEMOD175781-4 v8
Boolean to integer conversion with logical node
interruption should return to the state before the
representation, 16 bit (BTIGAPC) is used to transform a
interruption, or be reset. The function also propagates
set of 16 boolean (logical) signals into an integer. The
the time stamp and the quality of the input signal.
block input will freeze the output at the last value.
• TIMERSETQT function has pick-up and drop-out
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion IB16
delayed outputs related to the input signal. The timer SEMOD158373-5 v6
Integer to boolean 16 conversion function (IB16) is used
has a settable time delay. The function also
to transform an integer into a set of 16 boolean (logical)
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the
signals.
input signal.
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node
• XORQT XOR function block. The function also
representation ITBGAPC
propagates the time stamp and the quality of the SEMOD158421-5 v9
Integer to boolean conversion with logic node
input signals. Each block has two outputs where one is
representation function (ITBGAPC) is used to transform
inverted.
an integer which is transmitted over IEC 61850 and
received by the function to 16 boolean (logic) output
Extension logic package GUID-144BAAA3-A5EF-49AF-8876-93CC5F3D0234 v1
signals.
The logic extension block package includes additional
trip matrix logic and configurable logic blocks. Comparator for integer inputs INTCOMP
GUID-A93564FA-0017-4939-A9C1-095DA0FD9832 v1
The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of
Fixed signal function block FXDSIGN M15322-3 v15
integer values in the system relative to each other or to
The Fixed signals function (FXDSIGN) has nine pre-set a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can be
(fixed) signals that can be used in the configuration of used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and other
an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in other logics.
function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating
certain logic. Boolean, integer, floating point, string Comparator for real inputs REALCOMP GUID-E17A88D7-D095-4F36-9CD5-64EBFD2A1DEA v1

types of signals are available. The function gives the possibility to monitor the level of
real value signals in the system relative to each other or
One FXDSIGN function block is included in all IEDs. to a fixed value. It is a basic arithmetic function that can
be used for monitoring, supervision, interlocking and
Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and other logics.
overflow supervision TEIGAPC

ABB 49
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

A disturbance is defined as an activation of an input to

the AnRADR or BnRBDR function blocks, which are set to
16. Monitoring
trigger the disturbance recorder. All connected signals
Measurements CVMMXN, CMMXU, VNMMXU, from start of pre-fault time to the end of post-fault time
VMMXU, CMSQI, VMSQI will be included in the recording. Disturbance record will
M12024-3 v9
The measurement functions are used to get on-line have visible settings from all function instances that are
information from the IED. These service values make it configured in the application configuration tool.
possible to display on-line information on the local HMI
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in
and on the substation automation system about:
the standard Comtrade format as a reader file HDR, a
• measured voltages, currents, frequency, active, configuration file CFG, and a data file DAT. The same
reactive and apparent power and power factor applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a
• measured analog values from merging units ring-buffer. The local HMI is used to get information
• primary phasors about the recordings. The disturbance report files can
• positive, negative and zero sequence currents and be uploaded to PCM600 for further analysis using the
voltages disturbance handling tool.
• mA, input currents
• pulse counters
Event list DRPRDRE M12412-6 v8
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring the
system from an overview perspective and is a
Supervision of mA input signals M16054-3 v2
complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The main purpose of the function is to measure and
process signals from different measuring transducers. The event list logs all binary input signals connected to
Many devices used in process control represent various the Disturbance recorder function. The list may contain
parameters such as frequency, temperature and DC up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
battery voltage as low current values, usually in the
range 4-20 mA or 0-20 mA. Indications DRPRDRE M12030-3 v7
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about
Alarm limits can be set and used as triggers, e.g. to disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
generate trip or alarm signals. system it is important to know, for example binary
signals that have changed status during a disturbance.
The function requires that the IED is equipped with the This information is used in the short perspective to get
mA input module. information via the local HMI in a straightforward way.

Disturbance report DRPRDRE M12153-3 v14

There are three LEDs on the local HMI (green, yellow and
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in red), which will display status information about the IED
the primary and/or in the secondary system together and the Disturbance recorder function (triggered).
with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality. The Indication list function shows all selected binary
input signals connected to the Disturbance recorder
Disturbance report (DRPRDRE), always included in the function that have changed status during a disturbance.
IED, acquires sampled data of all selected analog input
and binary signals connected to the function block with Event recorder DRPRDRE M12033-3 v8

a maximum of 40 analog and 352 binary signals. Quick, complete and reliable information about
disturbances in the primary and/or in the secondary
The Disturbance report functionality is a common name system is vital, for example, time-tagged events logged
for several functions: during disturbances. This information is used for
different purposes in the short term (for example
• Event list
corrective actions) and in the long term (for example
• Indications
functional analysis).
• Event recorder
• Trip value recorder The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals
• Disturbance recorder connected to the Disturbance recorder function. Each
• Fault locator recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
• Settings information
The event recorder information is available for the
The Disturbance report function is characterized by disturbances locally in the IED.
great flexibility regarding configuration, starting
conditions, recording times, and large storage capacity.

50 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

The event recording information is an integrated part of

the disturbance record (Comtrade file). Generic communication function for Single Point
indication SPGAPC SEMOD55713-5 v8

Trip value recorder DRPRDRE M12128-3 v7

Generic communication function for Single Point
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for indication (SPGAPC) is used to send one single logical
currents and voltages are vital for the disturbance signal to other systems or equipment in the substation.
evaluation.
Generic communication function for measured
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all values MVGAPC SEMOD55872-5 v10
selected analog input signals connected to the Generic communication function for measured values
Disturbance recorder function. The result is magnitude (MVGAPC) function is used to send the instantaneous
and phase angle before and during the fault for each value of an analog signal to other systems or equipment
analog input signal. in the substation. It can also be used inside the same
IED, to attach a RANGE aspect to an analog value and to
The trip value recorder information is available for the permit measurement supervision on that value.
disturbances locally in the IED.
Measured value expander block RANGE_XP
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part
SEMOD52450-4 v8
The current and voltage measurements functions
of the disturbance record (Comtrade file). (CVMMXN, CMMXU, VMMXU and VNMMXU), current and
voltage sequence measurement functions (CMSQI and
Disturbance recorder DRPRDRE M12156-3 v12 VMSQI) and IEC 61850 generic communication I/O
The Disturbance recorder function supplies fast,
functions (MVGAPC) are provided with measurement
complete and reliable information about disturbances in
supervision functionality. All measured values can be
the power system. It facilitates understanding system
supervised with four settable limits: low-low limit, low
behavior and related primary and secondary equipment
limit, high limit and high-high limit. The measure value
during and after a disturbance. Recorded information is
expander block (RANGE_XP) has been introduced to
used for different purposes in the short perspective (for
enable translating the integer output signal from the
example corrective actions) and long perspective (for
measuring functions to 5 binary signals: below low-low
example functional analysis).
limit, below low limit, normal, above high limit or above
The Disturbance recorder acquires sampled data from high-high limit. The output signals can be used as
selected analog and binary signals connected to the conditions in the configurable logic or for alarming
Disturbance recorder function (maximum 40 analog and purpose.
352 binary signals). The binary signals available are the
Insulation supervision for gas medium function
same as for the event recorder function.
SSIMG GUID-0692CD0D-F33E-4370-AC91-B216CAAAFC28 v6

The function is characterized by great flexibility and is Insulation supervision for gas medium (SSIMG) is used
not dependent on the operation of protection functions. for monitoring the circuit breaker condition. Binary
It can record disturbances not detected by protection information based on the gas pressure in the circuit
functions. Up to ten seconds of data before the trigger breaker is used as input signals to the function. In
instant can be saved in the disturbance file. addition, the function generates alarms based on
received information.
The disturbance recorder information for up to 100
disturbances are saved in the IED and the local HMI is Insulation supervision for liquid medium SSIML
GUID-3B1A665F-60A5-4343-85F4-AD9C066CBE8D v7

used to view the list of recordings . Insulation supervision for liquid medium (SSIML) is used
for monitoring the oil insulated device condition. For
Event function M12805-6 v11
example, transformers, shunt reactors, and so on. Binary
When using a Substation Automation system with LON information based on the oil level in the oil insulated
or SPA communication, time-tagged events can be sent devices are used as input signals to the function. In
at change or cyclically from the IED to the station level. addition, the function generates alarms based on the
These events are created from any available signal in the received information.
IED that is connected to the Event function (EVENT). The
EVENT function block is used for LON and SPA Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR
GUID-E1FD74C3-B9B6-4E11-AA1B-7E7F822FB4DD v13

communication. The circuit breaker condition monitoring function

(SSCBR) is used to monitor different parameters of the
Analog, integer and double indication values are also breaker condition. The breaker requires maintenance
transferred through the EVENT function. when the number of operations reaches a predefined
value. For a proper functioning of the circuit breaker, it
is essential to monitor the circuit breaker operation,

ABB 51
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

spring charge indication or breaker wear, travel time, GUID-D5A0DC68-B3FD-4EBE-A5ED-68BE7DA20245 v1

number of operation cycles and estimate the The through fault monitoring function PTRSTHR is used
accumulated energy during arcing periods. to monitor the mechanical stress on a transformer and
place it against its designed withstand capability.
During through faults, the fault-current magnitude is
Fault locator LMBRFLO M13970-3 v13 higher as the allowed overload current range. At low
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to fault current magnitudes which are below the overload
minimize the outages after a persistent fault and/or to capability of the transformer, mechanical effects are
pin-point a weak spot on the line. considered less important unless the frequency of fault
occurrence is high. Since through fault current
The fault locator is an impedance measuring function
magnitudes are typically closer to the extreme design
giving the distance to the fault in km, miles or % of line
capabilities of the transformer, mechanical effects are
length. The main advantage is the high accuracy
more significant than thermal effects.
achieved by compensating for load current and for the
mutual zero-sequence effect on double circuit lines. For other power system objects, for example, an over-
head line, this function can be used to make a log of all
The compensation includes setting of the remote and
START and/or TRIP operations of the protection IED.
local sources and calculation of the distribution of fault
currents from each side. This distribution of fault Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI
current, together with recorded load (pre-fault) GUID-CD97D6CF-7343-416B-82D3-8352FFF9D73E v1
Current harmonic monitoring function CHMMHAI is used
currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault position. to monitor the current part of the power quality of a
The fault can be recalculated with new source data at system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD)
the actual fault to further increase the accuracy. with respect to fundamental signal amplitude, and the
total demand distortion (TDD) with respect to maximum
Especially on heavily loaded long lines, where the source
demand load current. These indices indicate the current
voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart, the
signal quality factor.
accuracy can be still maintained with the advanced
compensation included in fault locator. Additionally, the function is used to calculate the
numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics
Event counter with limit supervison L4UFCNT
GUID-13157EAB-1686-4D2E-85DF-EC89768F3572 v6
The Limit counter (L4UFCNT) provides a settable amplitude and harmonic distortion upto the 5 th order. It
counter with four independent limits where the number helps the user to know the predominant harmonic
of positive and/or negative flanks on the input signal frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the
are counted against the setting values for limits. The system. The function also calculates the crest factor to
output for each limit is activated when the counted indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations
value reaches that limit. in the harmonic monitoring function are based on IEEE
1459 and IEEE 519 standards.
Overflow indication is included for each up-counter.
The current harmonic function monitors the harmonic
Running hour-meter TEILGAPC distortion and demand distortion values constantly.
GUID-464FB24F-B367-446C-963A-A14841943B87 v2
The Running hour-meter (TEILGAPC) function is a Whenever these value crosses their set limit levels, a
function that accumulates the elapsed time when a warning signal will be initiated. If the warning signal
given binary signal has been high. persists continuously for the set time, an alarm signal
will be generated.
The main features of TEILGAPC are:
Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAIGUID-868ED1BB-A921-45DE-94C4-0CF23ECD9ADA v1
• Applicable to very long time accumulation (≤ 99999.9 Voltage harmonic monitoring function VHMMHAI is used
hours) to monitor the voltage part of the power quality of a
• Supervision of limit transgression conditions and system. It calculates the total harmonic distortion (THD)
rollover/overflow with respect to the fundamental signal amplitude which
• Possibility to define a warning and alarm with the indicates the voltage signal quality factor.
resolution of 0.1 hours
• Retain any saved accumulation value at a restart Additionally, the function is used to calculate the
• Possibilities for blocking and reset numerical multiple of rated frequency harmonics
• Possibility for manual addition of accumulated time amplitude and harmonic distortion upto the 5th order. It
• Reporting of the accumulated time helps the user to know the predominant harmonic
frequencies order and their amplitudes present in the
system. The function also calculates the crest factor to
Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR
indicate the effectiveness of the signal. All calculations

52 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

in the harmonic monitoring function are based on IEEE

1459 and IEEE 519 standards.

The voltage harmonic function monitors the harmonic 18. Human machine interface
distortion value constantly. Whenever these value
crosses their set limit levels, a warning signal will be Local HMI AMU0600442 v15

initiated. If the warning signal persists continuously for

the set time, an alarm signal will be generated.

17. Metering

Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT M13394-3 v7

Pulse-counter logic (PCFCNT) function counts externally
generated binary pulses, for instance pulses coming
from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the
binary input module and then read by the PCFCNT
function. A scaled service value is available over the
station bus. The special Binary input module with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be ordered
to achieve this functionality.

Function for energy calculation and demand

handling ETPMMTR GUID-6898E29B-DA70-421C-837C-1BBED8C63A7A v3
Power system measurement (CVMMXN) can be used to
measure active as well as reactive power values.
Function for energy calculation and demand handling
(ETPMMTR) uses measured active and reactive power as
input and calculates the accumulated active and reactive
energy pulses, in forward and reverse direction. Energy IEC13000239-3-en.vsd

values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum IEC13000239 V3 EN-US

Figure 16. Local human-machine interface

demand power values are also calculated by the
function. This function includes zero point clamping to
remove noise from the input signal. As output of this The LHMI of the IED contains the following elements
function: periodic energy calculations, integration of • Graphical display capable of showing a user defined
energy values, calculation of energy pulses, alarm single line diagram and provide an interface for
signals for limit violation of energy values and maximum controlling switchgear.
power demand, can be found. • Navigation buttons and five user defined command
buttons to shortcuts in the HMI tree or simple
The values of active and reactive energies are calculated
commands.
from the input power values by integrating them over a
• 15 user defined three-color LEDs.
selected time tEnergy. The integration of active and
• Communication port for PCM600.
reactive energy values will happen in both forward and
reverse directions. These energy values are available as
output signals and also as pulse outputs. Integration of The LHMI is used for setting, monitoring and controlling.
energy values can be controlled by inputs (STARTACC
and STOPACC) and EnaAcc setting and it can be reset to
initial values with RSTACC input.
19. Basic IED functions
The maximum demand for active and reactive powers
are calculated for the set time interval tEnergy and Time synchronization M11344-3 v11
these values are updated every minute through output The time synchronization function is used to select a
channels. The active and reactive maximum power common source of absolute time for the synchronization
demand values are calculated for both forward and of the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This
reverse direction and these values can be reset with makes it possible to compare events and disturbance
RSTDMD input. data between all IEDs within a station automation
ABB 53
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

system and in between sub-stations. A common source (PRP) is available as an option when ordering IEDs. PRP
shall be used for IED and merging unit when IEC/UCA according to IEC 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet
61850-9-2LE process bus communication is used. ports.
M11345-3 v11
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR
Precision time protocol PTP Redundant station bus communication according to IEC
PTP according to IEEE 1588-2008 and specifically its 62439-3 Edition 2 High-availability seamless redundancy
profile IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3 for power utility automation (HSR) is available as an option when ordering IEDs.
is a synchronization method that can be used to Redundant station bus communication according to IEC
maintain a common time within a station. This time can 62439-3 uses two optical Ethernet ports.
be synchronized to the global time using, for instance, a
GPS receiver. If PTP is enabled on the IEDs and the The HSR ring supports the connection of up to 30 relays.
switches that connect the station are compatible with If more than 30 relays are to be connected, it is
IEEE 1588, the station will become synchronized to one recommended to split the network into several rings to
common time with an accuracy of under 1us. Using an guarantee the performance for real-time applications.
IED as a boundary clock between several networks will
keep 1us accuracy on three levels or when using an HSR, Routes GUID-95F9C7BA-92F8-489F-AD0A-047410B5E66F v1

15 IEDs can be connected in a ring without losing a A route is a specified path for data to travel between the
single microsecond in accuracy. source device in a subnetwork to the destination device
in a different subnetwork. A route consists of a
destination address and the address of the gateway to
be used when sending data to the destination device,
20. Ethernet see Figure 18.

Access points GUID-6E5D2696-A8EE-43E7-A94B-69C3D0612127 v2

An access point is an Ethernet communication interface
for single or redundant station communication. Each
access point is allocated with one physical Ethernet Default gateway
port, two physical Ethernet ports are allocated if
redundant communication is activated for the access
point. Gateway

Source Destination
Device 1 Device 1 IEC16000095-1-en.vsdx
IEC16000095 V1 EN-US

Figure 18. Route from source to destination through gateway

AP1 AP2 AP3 AP1 AP2 AP3
SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303 SFP_301 SFP_302 SFP_303

IEC16000092-1-en.vsdx

IEC16000092 V1 EN-US

Figure 17. Access points, non redundant (left) and redundant

communication (right)
21. Station communication

Communication protocols
Access points diagnostics GUID-20F64A6D-AA8C-47D7-AA7D-4810996B2FF2 v2 Each IED is provided with several communication
M14815-3 v14

The access point diagnostics function blocks (RCHLCCH, interfaces enabling it to connect to one or many
SCHLCCH and FRONTSTATUS) supervise substation level systems or equipment, either on the
communication. SCHLCCH is used for communication Substation Automation (SA) bus or Substation
over the rear Ethernet ports, RCHLCCH is used for Monitoring (SM) bus.
redundant communications over the rear Ethernet ports
and FRONTSTATUS is used for communication over the Available communication protocols are:
front port. All access point function blocks include
output signal for denial of service. • IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol
• IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
Redundant communication GUID-A90FDBA7-D4D7-4CBD-9F05-13DCC9971779 v7
• LON communication protocol
• SPA communication protocol
IEC 62439-3 redundant communication PRP
• IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol
Redundant communication according to IEC 62439-3
PRP-0, IEC 62439-3 PRP-1 parallel redundancy protocol Several protocols can be combined in the same IED.
54 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

IEC 61850-8-1 communication protocol M14787-3 v16

Measurands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103MEAS
IEC 61850 Ed.1 or Ed.2 can be chosen by a setting in 103MEAS is a function block that reports all valid
PCM600. The IED is equipped with up to six (order measuring types depending on the connected signals.
dependent) optical Ethernet rear ports for IEC 61850-8-1 The set of connected inputs will control which ASDUs
station bus communication.The IEC 61850-8-1 (Application Service Data Units) are generated.
communication is also possible from the electrical
Ethernet front port. IEC 61850-8-1 protocol allows Measurands user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
intelligent electrical devices (IEDs) from different I103MEASUSR
vendors to exchange information and simplifies system I103MEASUSR is a function block with user-defined input
engineering. IED-to-IED communication using GOOSE measurands in monitor direction. These function blocks
and client-server communication over MMS are include the FunctionType parameter for each block in
supported. Disturbance recording file (COMTRADE) the private range, and the Information number
uploading can be done over MMS or FTP. parameter for each block.

Function status auto-recloser for IEC 60870-5-103 I103AR

The front port is only intended for I103AR is a function block with defined functions for
PCM600 communication, maintenance, autorecloser indications in monitor direction. This block
training and test purposes due to risk includes the FunctionType parameter, and the
of interference during normal information number parameter is defined for each
operation. output signal.

Function status earth-fault for IEC 60870-5-103 I103EF

IEC 61850 quality expander QUALEXP GUID-9C5DC78E-041B-422B-9668-320E62B847A2 v1
I103EF is a function block with defined functions for
The quality expander component is used to display the earth fault indications in monitor direction. This block
detailed quality of an IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE analog includes the FunctionType parameter; the information
channel. The component expands the channel quality number parameter is defined for each output signal.
output of a Merging Unit analog channel received in the
IED as per the IEC 61850-7-3 standard. This component Function status fault protection for IEC 60870-5-103
can be used during the ACT monitoring to get the I103FLTPROT
particular channel quality of the Merging Unit. I103FLTPROT is used for fault indications in monitor
direction. Each input on the function block is specific for
IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE communication protocol
GUID-C3AA21B4-730F-4327-943A-3C77102A80A0 v4
a certain fault type and therefore must be connected to
Optical Ethernet port communication standard IEC/UCA a correspondent signal present in the configuration. For
61850-9-2LE for process bus is supported. IEC/UCA example: 68_TRGEN represents the General Trip of the
61850-9-2LE allows Non Conventional Instrument device and must be connected to the general trip signal
Transformers (NCIT) with Merging Units (MUs) or stand- SMPPTRC_TRIP or equivalent.
alone MUs to exchange information with the IED, and
simplifies SA engineering. IEC/UCA 61850-9-2LE uses IED status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IED
the same port as IEC 61850-8-1. I103IED is a function block with defined IED functions in
monitor direction. This block uses the parameter
LON communication protocol SEMOD120140-5 v3
FunctionType; the information number parameter is
Existing stations with ABB station bus LON can be defined for each input signal.
extended with use of the optical LON interface (glass or
plastic). This allows full SA functionality including peer- Supervison status for IEC 60870-5-103 I103SUPERV
to-peer messaging and cooperation between the IEDs. I103SUPERV is a function block with defined functions
for supervision indications in monitor direction. This
SPA communication protocol SEMOD120134-5 v1
block includes the FunctionType parameter; the
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the ABB SPA information number parameter is defined for each
protocol. This allows extensions of simple substation output signal.
automation systems but the main use is for Substation
Monitoring Systems SMS. Status for user-defined signals for IEC 60870-5-103
I103USRDEF
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol SEMOD120137-5 v4
I103USRDEF comprises function blocks with user-
A single glass or plastic port is provided for the IEC defined input signals in monitor direction. These
60870-5-103 standard. This allows design of simple function blocks include the FunctionType parameter for
substation automation systems including equipment each block in the private range, and the information
from different vendors. Disturbance files uploading is number parameter for each input signal.
provided.
ABB 55
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Function commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103CMD Multiple command and transmit M14791-3 v3
I103CMD is a command function block in control When IEDs are used in Substation Automation systems
direction with pre-defined output signals. The signals with LON, SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 communication
are in steady state, not pulsed, and stored in the IED in protocols, the Event and Multiple Command function
case of restart. blocks are used as the communication interface for
vertical communication to station HMI and gateway, and
IED commands for IEC 60870-5-103 I103IEDCMD as interface for horizontal peer-to-peer communication
I103IEDCMD is a command block in control direction (over LON only).
with defined IED functions. All outputs are pulsed and
they are NOT stored. Pulse-time is a hidden parameter.

Function commands user-defined for IEC 60870-5-103

22. Remote communication
I103USRCMD
I103USRCMD is a command block in control direction Analog and binary signal transfer to remote end
with user-defined output signals. These function blocks
M12449-6 v3
Three analog and eight binary signals can be exchanged
include the FunctionType parameter for each block in between two IEDs. This functionality is mainly used for
the private range, and the Information number the line differential protection. However it can be used
parameter for each output signal. in other products as well. An IED can communicate with
up to 4 remote IEDs.
Function commands generic for IEC 60870-5-103
I103GENCMD Binary signal transfer
I103GENCMD is used for transmitting generic
SEMOD52522-4 v9
The remote end data communication is used for the
commands over IEC 60870-5-103. The function has two transmission of analog values for line differential
output signals, CMD_OFF and CMD_ON, that can be used protection or for the transmission of only binary signals
to implement double-point command schemes. between IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable
and can thus be used for any purpose, such as
The I103GENCMD component can be configured as
communication scheme related signals, transfer trip
either 2 pulsed ON/OFF or 2 steady ON/OFF outputs.
and/or other binary signals between IEDs.
The ON output is pulsed with a command with value 2,
while the OFF output is pulsed with a command with Communication between two IEDs requires that each
value 1. If in steady mode is ON asserted and OFF IED is equipped with a Line Data Communication Module
deasserted with command 2 and vice versa with (LDCM). The LDCM then acts as an interface to 64 kbit/s
command 1. and 2Mbit/s communication channels for duplex
communication between the IEDs. In 2Mbit/s mode,
IED commands with position and select for IEC
each LDCM can send and receive up to 9 analog and up
60870-5-103 I103POSCMD
to 192 binary signals simultaneously. In 64kbit/s mode,
I103POSCMD has double-point position indicators that
the LDCM can be configured to work in either analog
are getting the position value as an integer (for
mode or binary mode. In analog mode, the IED can send
example, from the POSITION output of the SCSWI
and receive up to 3 analog signals and up to 8 binary
function block) and sending it over IEC 60870-5-103
signals. In binary mode, the LDCM can send and receive
(1=OPEN; 2=CLOSE). The standard does not define the
only binary data (up to 192 binary signals).
use of values 0 and 3. However, when connected to a
switching device, these values are transmitted.

The BLOCK input will block only the signals in

monitoring direction (the position information), not the
The IED can be equipped with up to four short range,
commands via IEC 60870-5-103. The SELECT input is
medium range or long range LDCMs.
used to indicate that the monitored apparatus has been
selected (in a select-before-operate type of control). Line data communication module, short, medium
and long range LDCM
DNP3.0 communication protocol SEMOD153688-5 v3
SEMOD168481-4 v10
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for
An electrical RS485 serial port, optical serial ports on the
communication between the IEDs situated at a distance
serial communication module (SLM), optical Ethernet
<110 km/68 miles or from the IED to the optical-to-
ports are available for DNP3.0 communication. DNP3.0
electrical converter with G.703 or G.703E1 interface
Level 2 communication with unsolicited events, time
located at a distance < 3 km/1.9 miles away. The LDCM
synchronization and disturbance reporting is provided
module sends and receives data to and from another
for communication to RTUs, Gateways or HMI systems.

56 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

LDCM module. The IEEE/ANSI C37.94 standard format is Binary input/output module IOM
M6939-3 v6
used. The binary input/output module is used when only a few
input and output channels are needed. The ten standard
Galvanic X.21 line data communication module X.21- output channels are used for trip output or any signaling
LDCM GUID-3C6C7DAC-1DB1-4CB8-991F-3B1D86551F28 v3 purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are
A module with built-in galvanic X.21 converter which e.g. used for applications where short operating time is
can be connected to modems for pilot wires is also essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
available. required binary input information.

Galvanic interface G.703 resp G.703E1 M16035-3 v5 mA input module MIM

The external galvanic data communication converter The milli-ampere input module is used to interface
M15020-3 v4

G.703/G.703E1 makes an optical-to-galvanic conversion transducer signals in the –20 to +20 mA range from for
for connection to a multiplexer. These units are example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
designed for 64 kbit/s resp 2Mbit/s operation. The transducers. The module has six independent,
converter is delivered with 19” rack mounting galvanically separated channels.
accessories.
Optical Ethernet module
M16073-3 v9
The optical Ethernet module (OEM) provides two
additional optical Ethernet ports. The port connectors
23. Hardware description are of optical (type LC) or galvanic (type RJ45) Ethernet
ports.
Hardware modules IP14529-1 v1
Numeric processing module NUM Serial and LON communication module (SLM) for SPA/IEC
M12643-3 v4
The numeric processing module (NUM) is a CPU module 60870-5-103, LON and DNP 3.0
M14933-3 v6
that handles all protection functions and logic. The Serial and LON communication module (SLM) is
used for SPA, IEC 60870-5-103, DNP3 and LON
NUM provides up to 4 optical (type LC) or galvanic (type communication. SLM has two optical communication
RJ45) Ethernet ports(one basic and three optional). ports for plastic/plastic, plastic/glass or glass/glass
fiber cables. One port is used for serial communication
Power supply module PSM
M11595-3 v6
(SPA, IEC 60870-5-103 or DNP3 port) and the other port
The power supply module is used to provide the correct
is used for LON communication.
internal voltages and full isolation between the IED and
the battery system. An internal fail alarm output is Line data communication module LDCM
available. M16075-3 v5
Each module has one optical port, one for each remote
end to which the IED communicates.
Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type
can be ordered. Alternative modules for Long range (1550 nm single
mode), Medium range (1310 nm single mode) and Short
Binary input module BIM
M1769-3 v4
range (850 nm multi mode) are available.
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs
and is available in two versions, one standard and one Galvanic RS485 serial communication module
with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs The Galvanic RS485 communication module (RS485) is
SEMOD158664-5 v3

to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary used for DNP3.0 and IEC 60870-5-103 communication.
inputs are freely programmable and can be used for the The module has one RS485 communication port. The
input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can RS485 is a balanced serial communication that can be
also be included in the disturbance recording and event- used either in 2-wire or 4-wire connections. A 2-wire
recording functions. This enables extensive monitoring connection uses the same signal for RX and TX and is a
and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all multidrop communication with no dedicated Master or
associated electrical circuits. slave. This variant requires however a control of the
output. The 4-wire connection has separated signals for
Binary output module BOM
M6938-3 v4
RX and TX multidrop communication with a dedicated
The binary output module has 24 independent output
Master and the rest are slaves. No special control signal
relays and is used for trip output or any signaling
is needed in this case.
purpose.
GPS time synchronization module GTM
Static binary output module SOM M14851-3 v5
SEMOD174196-4 v4
This module includes a GPS receiver used for time
The static binary output module has six fast static
synchronization. The GTM has one SMA contact for
outputs and six change over output relays for use in
applications with high speed requirements.

ABB 57
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

connection to an antenna. It also includes an optical PPS

ST-connector output.

IRIG-B Time synchronizing module

SEMOD141113-4 v9
The IRIG-B time synchronizing module is used for
accurate time synchronizing of the IED from a station
clock.

The Pulse Per Second (PPS) input is supported.

Electrical (BNC) and optical connection (ST) for 0XX and

12X IRIG-B support.

Transformer input module TRM

M14875-3 v9
The transformer input module is used to galvanically
separate and adapt the secondary currents and voltages
generated by the measuring transformers. The module
has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents
and voltage inputs.

Alternative connectors of Ring lug or Compression type

can be ordered. IEC08000165‐3‐en.vsdx

IEC08000165 V3 EN-US

High impedance resistor unit Figure 20. Case with rear cover and 19” rack mounting kit
M16727-3 v2
The high impedance resistor unit, with resistors for
pick-up value setting and a voltage dependent resistor,
is available in a single phase unit and a three phase unit.
Both are mounted on a 1/1 19 inch apparatus plate with
compression type terminals.

Layout and dimensions IP14539-1 v1

Dimensions
IP14826-1
M15243-4 v1
v7

IEC06000182-2-en.vsd
IEC06000182 V2 EN-US

Figure 21. A 1/2 x 19” size IED side-by-side with RHGS6.

M15243-12 v10

IEC08000163‐3‐en.vsdx

IEC08000163 V3 EN-US

Figure 19. Case with rear cover

58 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Case size A B C D E F G H I
(mm)/
(inches)

6U, 1/2 x 19” 265.9/ 223.7/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 205.8/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 8.81 9.74 10.04 8.10 7.50 18.36 9.15 19

6U, 3/4 x 19” 265.9/ 335.9/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 318.0/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 13.23 9.74 10.04 12.52 7.50 18.36 9.15 19

6U, 1/1 x 19” 265.9/ 448.0/ 247.5/ 255.0/ 430.1/ 190.5/ 466.5/ 232.5/ 482.6/
10.47 17.65 9.74 10.04 16.86 7.50 18.36 9.15 19

The G and H dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.

Mounting alternatives See ordering for details about available mounting

M16079-3 v14
• 19” rack mounting kit alternatives.
• Flush mounting kit with cut-out dimensions:
– 1/2 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 210.1 mm/
8.27”
– 3/4 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 322.4 mm/
12.69”
– 1/1 case size (h) 254.3 mm/10.01” (w) 434.7 mm/
17.11”
• Wall mounting kit

ABB 59
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B33X00

1MRK002807-DF
24. Connection diagrams GUID-CF4EFFA5-3081-4FC7-9A14-ED127C3C0FDE v7
The connection diagrams are delivered in the IED Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, A42X00
Connectivity package as part of the product delivery. 1MRK002807-DG

The latest versions of the connection diagrams can be Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, B42X00
downloaded from 1MRK002807-DH
http://www.abb.com/protection-control.
Connection diagram, RED670 2.2, C42X00
Connection diagrams for IEC Customized products 1MRK002807-DK

Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002801-AG Connection diagrams for ANSI Customized products

Connection diagrams for Configured products Connection diagram, 670 series 2.2 1MRK002802-AG

60 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

25. Technical data

General M10993-1 v3 IP11376-1 v2

Definitions

Reference value The specified value of an influencing factor to which are referred the characteristics of the equipment

Nominal range The range of values of an influencing quantity (factor) within which, under specified conditions, the equipment meets
the specified requirements

Operative range The range of values of a given energizing quantity for which the equipment, under specified conditions, is able to
perform its intended functions according to the specified requirements

Presumptions for Technical Data 6. Parameter SBase used by the tested function is set
GUID-1E949E38-E04D-4374-A086-912C25E9F93C v2
The technical data stated in this document are only valid equal to:
under the following circumstances: – √3 × IBase × UBase
7. The rated secondary quantities have the following
1. Main current transformers with 1 A or 2 A secondary values:
rating are wired to the IED 1 A rated CT inputs. – Rated secondary phase current Ir is either 1 A or 5 A
2. Main current transformer with 5 A secondary rating
depending on selected TRM.
are wired to the IED 5 A rated CT inputs.
– Rated secondary phase-to-phase voltage Ur is
3. CT and VT ratios in the IED are set in accordance with
within the range from 100 V to 120 V.
the associated main instrument transformers. Note
– Rated secondary power for three-phase system S r =
that for functions which measure an analogue signal
√3 × U r × Ir
which do not have corresponding primary quantity
the 1:1 ratio shall be set for the used analogue inputs 8. For operate and reset time testing, the default
on the IED. Example of such functions are: HZPDIF, setting values of the function are used if not explicitly
ROTIPHIZ and STTIPHIZ. stated otherwise.
4. Parameter IBase used by the tested function is set 9. During testing, signals with rated frequency have
equal to the rated CT primary current. been injected if not explicitly stated otherwise.
5. Parameter UBase used by the tested function is set
equal to the rated primary phase-to-phase voltage.

ABB 61
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Energizing quantities, rated values and limits

Analog inputs
M16988-1 v11 IP15842-1 v1

Table 11. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for protection transformer

Description Value

Frequency

Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs

Rated current Ir 1 or 5 A

Operating range (0-100) x Ir

Thermal withstand 100 × Ir for 1 s *)

30 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min
4 × Ir continuously

Dynamic withstand 250 × Ir one half wave

Burden < 20 mVA at Ir = 1 A

< 150 mVA at Ir = 5 A

*) max. 350 A for 1 s when COMBITEST test switch is included.

Voltage inputs **)

Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V

**) all values for individual voltage inputs

Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency

62 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 12. TRM - Energizing quantities, rated values and limits for measuring transformer

Description Value

Frequency

Rated frequency fr 50/60 Hz

Operating range fr ± 10%

Current inputs

Rated current Ir 1A 5A

Operating range (0-1.8) × Ir (0-1.6) × Ir

Thermal withstand 80 × Ir for 1 s 65 × Ir for 1 s

25 × Ir for 10 s 20 × Ir for 10 s
10 × Ir for 1 min 8 × Ir for 1 min
1.8 × Ir for 30 min 1.6 × Ir for 30 min
1.1 × Ir continuously 1.1 × Ir continuously

Burden < 200 mVA at Ir < 350 mVA at Ir

Voltage inputs *)

Rated voltage Ur 110 or 220 V

Operating range 0 - 340 V

Thermal withstand 450 V for 10 s

420 V continuously

Burden < 20 mVA at 110 V

< 80 mVA at 220 V

*) all values for individual voltage inputs

Note! All current and voltage data are specified as RMS values at rated frequency
M6389-1 v5

Table 13. MIM - mA input module

Quantity: Rated value: Nominal range:

Input resistance Rin = 194 Ohm -

Input range ±5, ±10, ±20 mA -

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

Power consumption -
each mA board £2W
each mA input £ 0.1 W

Auxiliary DC voltage
M12286-1 v9 IP15843-1 v3

Table 14. PSM - Power supply module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Auxiliary DC voltage, EL (input) EL = (24-60) V EL ±20%

EL = (90-250) V EL ±20%

Power consumption 50 W typically -

Auxiliary DC power in-rush < 10 A during 0.1 s -

Supply interruption bridging time < 50 ms -

ABB 63
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Binary inputs and outputs

M12576-1 v12 IP15844-1 v1

Table 15. BIM - Binary input module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz

*Debounce filter Settable 1–20 ms

Binary input operate time 3 ms -

(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)

* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.

Maximum 176 binary input channels The stated operate time for functions
may be activated simultaneously with include the operating time for the
influencing factors within nominal binary inputs and outputs.
range.
M50609-2 v9

Table 16. BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 16 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption
24/30 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -

Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz

Release settable 1–30 Hz

*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Binary input operate time 3 ms -

(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)

* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.

64 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Maximum 176 binary input channels The stated operate time for functions
may be activated simultaneously with include the operating time for the
influencing factors within nominal binary inputs and outputs.
range.
M12573-1 v11

Table 17. IOM - Binary input/output module

Quantity Rated value Nominal range

Binary inputs 8 -

DC voltage, RL 24/30 V RL ±20%

48/60 V RL ±20%
110/125 V RL ±20%
220/250 V RL ±20%

Power consumption -
24/30 V, 50 mA max. 0.05 W/input
48/60 V, 50 mA max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V, 50 mA max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V, 50 mA max. 0.4 W/input
220/250 V, 110 mA max. 0.5 W/input

Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max

Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1-40 Hz

Release settable 1-30 Hz

*Debounce filter Settable 1-20 ms

Binary input operate time 3 ms -

(Debounce filter set to 0 ms)

* Note: For compliance with surge immunity a debounce filter time setting of 5 ms is required.

ABB 65
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Maximum 176 binary input channels The stated operate time for functions
may be activated simultaneously with include the operating time for the
influencing factors within nominal binary inputs and outputs.
range.
M12318-1 v10

Table 18. IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)

Binary outputs 10 2

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

Min load voltage 24VDC —

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms 800 V DC

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A 12 A

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms

0.2 s
1.0 s 30 A 0.4 A
10 A 0.4 A

Making capacity at resistive load

220–250 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
24–30 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Max operations with load 1000

Max operations with no load 10000

Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms

66 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated The stated operate time for functions
simultaneously with influencing factors include the operating time for the
within nominal range. After 6 ms an binary inputs and outputs.
additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the M12584-1 v10

96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48

outputs can be activated during 1 s.
Continued activation is possible with
respect to current consumption but
after 5 minutes the temperature rise
will adversely affect the hardware life.
Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.

Table 19. IOM with MOV and IOM 220/250 V, 110mA - contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed relay)

Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V DC

Min load voltage 24VDC -

Test voltage across open 250 V rms 250 V rms

contact, 1 min

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous 8A 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A 10 A
Per process connector pin, 12 A 12 A
continuous

Making capacity at inductive

loadwith L/R > 10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A

Making capacity at resistive

load 220–250 V/0.4 A
30 A 110–125 V/0.4 A
0.2 s 10 A 48–60 V/0.2 A
1.0 s 24–30 V/0.1 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A

> 0.4

Breaking capacity for DC with 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A

L/R < 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A

Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF

Max operations with load 1000 -

Max operations with no load 10000 -

Operating time < 6 ms <= 1 ms

ABB 67
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Maximum 72 outputs may be activated The stated operate time for functions
simultaneously with influencing factors include the operating time for the
within nominal range. After 6 ms an binary inputs and outputs.
additional 24 outputs may be
activated. The activation time for the SEMOD175395-2 v9

96 outputs must not exceed 200 ms. 48

outputs can be activated during 1 s.
Continued activation is possible with
respect to current consumption but
after 5 minutes the temperature rise
will adversely affect the hardware life.
Maximum two relays per
BOM/IOM/SOM should be activated
continuously due to power dissipation.

Table 20. SOM - Static Output Module (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Static binary outputs

Function of quantity Static binary output trip

Rated voltage 48-60 VDC 110-250 VDC

Number of outputs 6 6

Impedance open state ~300 kΩ ~810 kΩ

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min No galvanic separation No galvanic separation

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 5A 5A

1.0 s 10 A 10 A

Making capacity at capacitive load with the

maximum capacitance of 0.2 μF :

0.2 s 30 A 30 A

1.0 s 10 A 10 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A 110 V/0.4 A

60 V/0.75 A 125 V/0.35 A

220 V/0.2 A

250 V/0.15 A

Operating time < 1 ms < 1 ms

68 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 21. SOM - Static Output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2): Electromechanical relay outputs

Function of quantity Trip and signal relays

Max system voltage 250 V AC/DC

Min load voltage 24VDC

Number of outputs 6

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity:

Continuous 8A

1.0 s 10 A

Max operations with load 1000

Max operations with no load 10000

Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum capacitance

of 0.2 μF:

0.2 s 30 A

1.0 s 10 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R ≤ 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A

125 V/0.35 A

220 V/0.2 A

250 V/0.15 A

Operating time < 6 ms

ABB 69
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12441-1 v10

The stated operate time for functions

include the operating time for the
binary inputs and outputs.

Table 22. BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)

Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays

Binary outputs 24

Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC

Min load voltage 24VDC

Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms

Current carrying capacity

Per relay, continuous 8A
Per relay, 1 s 10 A
Per process connector pin, continuous 12 A

Max operations with load 1000

Max operations with no load 10000

Making capacity at inductive load with L/R > 10 ms

0.2 s 30 A
1.0 s 10 A

Breaking capacity for AC, cos j > 0.4 250 V/8.0 A

Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A

110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A

Operating time < 6 ms

The stated operate time for functions

include the operating time for the
binary inputs and outputs.

Influencing factors
M16705-1 v16 IP15846-1 v1

Table 23. Temperature and humidity influence

Parameter Reference value Nominal range Influence

Ambient temperature, operate +20±5°C -25°C to +55°C 0.02%/°C

value

Relative humidity 45-75% 10-90% -

Operative range 0-95%

Storage temperature - -40°C to +70°C -

70 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 24. Auxiliary DC supply voltage influence on functionality during operation

Dependence on Reference value Within nominal Influence

range

Ripple, in DC auxiliary voltage max. 2% 15% of EL 0.01%/%

Operative range Full wave
rectified

Auxiliary voltage dependence, ±20% of EL 0.01%/%

operate value

Interrupted auxiliary DC voltage 24-60 V DC ± 20%

100-250 V DC ±20%
Interruption
interval
0–50 ms No restart

0–∞ s Correct behaviour at power down

Restart time < 300 s

Table 25. Frequency influence (reference standard: IEC 60255–1)

Dependence on Within nominal range Influence

Frequency dependence, operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±1.0%/Hz

fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Frequency dependence for distance protection operate value fr ±2.5 Hz for 50 Hz ±2.0%/Hz
fr ±3.0 Hz for 60 Hz

Harmonic frequency dependence (20% content) 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±2.0%

Harmonic frequency dependence for distance protection (10% 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
content)

Harmonic frequency dependence for high impedance differential 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±10.0%
protection (10% content)

Harmonic frequency dependence for overcurrent protection 2nd, 3rd and 5th harmonic of fr ±3.0%

Type tests according to standards M16706-1 v14 IP15778-1 v1

ABB 71
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 26. Electromagnetic compatibility

Test Type test values Reference standards

1 MHz burst disturbance 2.5 kV IEC 60255-26

100 kHz slow damped oscillatory wave immunity test 2.5 kV IEC 61000-4-18, Level 3

Ring wave immunity test, 100 kHz 2-4 kV IEC 61000-4-12, Level 4

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEC 60255-26

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge IEC 61000-4-2, Level 4

Electrostatic discharge 15 kV air discharge IEEE/ANSI C37.90.3

Direct application 8 kV contact discharge
Indirect application 8 kV contact discharge

Fast transient disturbance 4 kV IEC 60255-26, Zone A

2 kV, SFP galvanic RJ45
2 kV, MIM mA-inputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B

Surge immunity test 2-4 kV, 1.2/50ms high energy IEC 60255-26, Zone A
1-2 kV, BOM and IRF outputs IEC 60255-26, Zone B

Power frequency immunity test 150-300 V, 50 Hz IEC 60255-26, Zone A

Conducted common mode immunity test 30-3 V, 15-150 Hz IEC 61000-4-16, Level 4

Power frequency magnetic field test 1000 A/m, 3 s IEC 61000-4-8, Level 5
100 A/m, cont.

Pulse magnetic field immunity test 1000 A/m IEC 61000–4–9, Level 5

Damped oscillatory magnetic field test 100 A/m IEC 61000-4-10, Level 5

Radiated electromagnetic field disturbance 20 V/m IEC 60255-26

80-1000 MHz IEEE/ANSI C37.90.2
1.4-2.7 GHz EN 50121-5
10 V/m, 2.7-6.0 GHz

Radiated emission 30-6000 MHz IEC 60255-26

30-8500 MHz IEEE/ANSI C63.4, FCC

Conducted emission 0.15-30 MHz IEC 60255-26

Table 27. Insulation

Test Type test values Reference standard

Dielectric test 2.0 kV AC, 1 min. IEC 60255-27

1.0 kV AC, 1 min.: ANSI C37.90
-SFP galvanic RJ45 IEEE 802.3-2015,
- X.21-LDCM Environment A

Impulse voltage test 5 kV, 1.2/50ms, 0.5 J

1 kV, 1.2/50 ms 0.5 J:
-SFP galvanic RJ45
- X.21-LDCM

Insulation resistance > 100 MW at 500 VDC

72 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 28. Environmental tests

Test Type test value Reference standard

Cold operation test Test Ad for 16 h at -25°C IEC 60068-2-1

Cold storage test Test Ab for 16 h at -40°C IEC 60068-2-1

Dry heat operation test Test Bd for 16 h at +70°C IEC 60068-2-2

Dry heat storage test Test Bb for 16 h at +85°C IEC 60068-2-2

Change of temperature test Test Nb for 5 cycles at -25°C to +70°C IEC 60068-2-14

Damp heat test, steady state Test Ca for 10 days at +40°C and humidity 93% IEC 60068-2-78

Damp heat test, cyclic Test Db for 6 cycles at +25 to +55°C and humidity 93 to 95% (1 cycle IEC 60068-2-30
= 24 hours)

Table 29. CE compliance

Test According to

Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) EN 60255–26

Low voltage (LVD) EN 60255–27

Table 30. Mechanical tests

Test Type test values Reference standards

Vibration response test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-1

Class I: Flush and wall mount

Vibration endurance test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-1

Shock response test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2

Shock withstand test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2

Bump test Class I: Rack, flush and wall mount IEC 60255-21-2

Seismic test Class II: Rack mount IEC 60255-21-3

Class I: Flush and wall mount

ABB 73
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Differential protection M13062-1 v21

Table 31. Restricted earth-fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic Adaptable ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Minimum pickup, IdMin (4.0-100.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Directional characteristic Fixed 180 degrees or ±60 to ±90 ±2.0 degrees

degrees

Operate time, trip at 0 to 10 x IdMin Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, trip at 10 x IdMin to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Second harmonic blocking 40.0% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

M13081-1 v12

Table 32. High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (10-900) V ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

I=U/R ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (30-900) V -

Maximum continuous power U>Trip2/SeriesResistor ≤200 W -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Ud Min. = 5 ms

Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Ud to 0 Min. = 75 ms

Max. = 95 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Ud -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Ud Min. = 25 ms

Max. = 35 ms

Reset time at 2 x Ud to 0 Min. = 50 ms

Max. = 70 ms

Critical impulse time 15 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Ud -

74 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M16023-1 v11

Table 33. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF single IED without communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -

SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -

EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -

EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -

Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 193,195 and table 197
193,195 and table 197

Critical impulse time 2ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 25 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 35 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 15 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 30 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 25 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 30 ms

L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 25 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 15 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 30 ms

ABB 75
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 33. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF single IED without communication , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 20 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 35 ms

The data in the table are valid for a single IED with two local current input groups.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to
zero on the other side.

76 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 34. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±4.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -

SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -

EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -

EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -

Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±4.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±4.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±3.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±10.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 193,195 and table 197
193,195 and table 197

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 30 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 50 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 10 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 25 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 25 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 20 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 40 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 15 ms -

sequence function Max. = 35 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 20 ms -

sequence function Max. = 35 ms

L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 10 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 30 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 20 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 45 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 25 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 20 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 50 ms

ABB 77
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 34. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 64 Kbit/s communication , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 15 ms -

sequence function Max. = 35 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 15 ms -

sequence function Max. = 40 ms

The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 64 Kbits/s communication in the loop-back mode.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group. The operate and reset times for L3CPDIF are valid for an static output
from SOM.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to
zero on the other side.

78 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-50.0)% -

SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -

EndSection 1 (20–150)% of IBase -

EndSection 2 (100–1000)% of IBase -

Unrestrained limit function (100–5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±1.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of fundamental ±3.0% of Ir

Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

*Inverse characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 193,195 and table 197
193,195 and table 197

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x IdMin -

Charging current compensation On/Off -

LT3CPDIF and LT6CPDIF (With in-zone transformer enabled and tIdMinHigh set to 0) :

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 25 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 40 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 20 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdUnre Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 35 ms

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 25 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 30 ms

L3CPDIF and L6CPDIF (With tIdMinHigh set to 0):

*Operate time, restrained function at Min. = 5 ms -

0 to 10 x IdMin Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, restrained function at 10 Min. = 15 ms -

x IdMinto 0 Max. = 35 ms

*Operate time, unrestrained function Min. = 5 ms -

at 0 to 10 x Id Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, unrestrained function at Min. = 15 ms -

10 x IdUnreto 0 Max. = 35 ms

ABB 79
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 35. Line differential protection L3CPDIF, L6CPDIF, LT3CPDIF, LT6CPDIF with 2 Mbits/s communication , continued
Function Range or value Accuracy

**Operate time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 25 ms

**Reset time, unrestrained negative Min. = 10 ms -

sequence function Max. = 30 ms

The data in the table are valid for a single IED with 2 Mbits/s communication in loop-back mode.
*Note: Data obtained with single three-phase input current group.
**Note: Data obtained with two three-phase input current groups. The rated symmetrical currents are applied on both sides as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by increasing one phase current to double on one side and decreasing same phase current to
zero on the other side.

80 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-6746298E-4C29-44C6-AB59-41EBF408A5E4 v3

Table 36. High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L4CPDIF with 2 Mbit/s communication

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (20-200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

SlopeSection2 (10.0-100.0)% -

SlopeSection3 (30.0-100.0)% -

EndSection1 (20–200)% of IBase -

EndSection2 (100–1000)% of IBase -

Unrestrained limit function (100–10000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of ±1.0% of Ir

fundamental Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

Fifth harmonic blocking (5.0–100.0)% of ±3.0% of Ir

fundamental Note: fundamental magnitude = 100% of Ir

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x -

IdMin

Operate time with two input Min. = 10 ms -

groups' currents, restrained Max. = 20 ms
function, in a 50 Hz system1)

Operate time with two input Min. = 8 ms -

groups' currents, restrained Max. = 17 ms
1)
function, in a 60 Hz system

Operate time, restrained function Min. = 10 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 50 Hz Max. = 20 ms
2)
system

Operate time, restrained function Min. = 8 ms -

at 0 to 10 x IdMin, in a 60 Hz Max. = 17 ms
2)
system

Reset time, restrained function at Min. = 45 ms -

10 x IdMin to 0
2)
Max. = 65 ms

Operate time, unrestrained Min. = 5 ms -

function at 0 to 10 x IdUnre2) Max. = 17 ms

Reset time, unrestrained function Min. = 45 ms -

at 10 x IdUnre to 0
2)
Max. = 65 ms

The data in the table are valid for single IED with 2 Mbit/s communication in loop-back mode.

1) This data is obtained by applying two three-phase input groups' currents to simulate an internal fault with default settings. Ir is applied to both input groups as pre- and
post-fault currents. The fault is performed by simultaneously increasing one group's currents to 10 x IdMin and decreasing the other group's currents to 0.
2) This data is obtained by applying one three-phase input group's currents only.

ABB 81
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-0BD8D3C9-620A-426C-BDB5-DAA0E4F8247F v4

Table 37. Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, zero sequence current (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate current, low current operation (1-100)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate voltage, phase to neutral (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate voltage, phase to phase (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay, zero sequence current at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low current operation at 2 x Iset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 40 ms

whichever is greater

Independent time delay, low voltage operation at 2 x Uset to 0 (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time delay for startup signal at 0 to 2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms
whichever is greater

82 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Impedance protection M13842-1 v15

Table 38. Distance measuring zone, Quad ZMQPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable -

direction

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -

current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -

phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

earth

Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

phase

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Zreach Max. = 50 ms

ABB 83
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD173239-2 v10

Table 39. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines ZMCPDIS, ZMCAPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -

current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, Ph- (10-1000)% of IBase -

Ph and Ph-E

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.01-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/phase
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Fault resistance, Ph-E (0.10-9000.00) Ω/loop

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (0.10-3000.00) Ω/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 35 ms whichever is greater

Ph-E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Zreach Max. = 50 ms
M16024-1 v12

Table 40. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed angle FDPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.5% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, phase-to- (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

earth faults, forward and
reverse

Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

phase faults, forward and
reverse

Load encroachment criteria:

Load resistance, forward and (1.00–3000.00) Ω/phase
reverse (5-70) degrees
Safety load impedance angle

Reset ratio 105% typically -

84 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD173242-2 v14

Table 41. Full-scheme distance protection, Mho characteristic ZMHPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones, Ph-E Max 5 with selectable -

direction

Minimum operate current (10–30)% of IBase -

Positive sequence impedance, (0.005–3000.000) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Ph-E loop Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence impedance (10–90) degrees
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
angle, Ph-E loop
Angle: 85 degrees
Reverse reach, Ph-E loop (0.005–3000.000) Ω/phase
(Magnitude)

Magnitude of earth return (0.00–3.00)

compensation factor KN

Angle for earth compensation (-180–180) degrees

factor KN

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s and
0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±60 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation

Operate time 22 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.5 x Zreach to Min. = 30 ms -

1.5 x Zreach Max. = 50 ms
SEMOD173249-2 v8

Table 42. Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth faults ZMMPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with selectable direction -

Minimum operate current (10-30)% of IBase -

Positive sequence reactance (0.50-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase
Conditions:
Zero sequence reactance (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) W/loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured -

with CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay Ph-Ph and (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Ph-E operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Zreach Max. = 50 ms

ABB 85
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD153649-2 v8

Table 43. Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Load encroachment criteria: (1.00–3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Load resistance, forward and (5–70) degrees Conditions:
reverse Voltage range: (0.1–1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5–30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
GUID-7617A215-AE7C-47CC-B189-4914F530F717 v7

Table 44. Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic, separate settings ZMRPDIS, ZMRAPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones Max 5 with -

selectable direction

Minimum operate residual (5-1000)% of IBase -

current, zone 1

Minimum operate current, (10-1000)% of IBase -

phase-to-phase and phase-to-
earth

Positive sequence reactance (0.10-3000.00) Ω/ ±2.0% static accuracy

phase ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.01-1000.00) Ω/
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
phase
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Zero sequence reactance (0.10-9000.00) Ω/ Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
phase

Zero sequence resistance (0.01-3000.00) Ω/

phase

Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-9000.00) Ω/

earth loop

Fault resistance, phase-to- (0.10-3000.00) Ω/

phase loop

Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVT’s
and 0.5<SIR<30

Definite time delay phase- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

phase and phase-earth
operation

Operate time 25 ms typically IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Reset time at 0.1 x Zreach to 2 Min. = 20 ms -

x Zreach Max. =50 ms

86 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-9E13C38A-3B6D-402B-98A6-6CDA20632CE7 v5

Table 45. Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable angle FRPSPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum operate current (5-500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reactive reach, positive (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

sequence ±2.0 degrees static angular accuracy
Conditions:
Resistive reach, positive (0.10–1000.00) Ω/phase
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
sequence
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Reactive reach, zero sequence (0.50–9000.00) Ω/phase Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees

Resistive reach, zero sequence (0.50–3000.00) Ω/phase

Fault resistance, Ph-E faults, (1.00–9000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse

Fault resistance, Ph-Ph faults, (0.50–3000.00) Ω/loop

forward and reverse

Reset ratio 105% typically -

ABB 87
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-6C2EF52A-8166-4A23-9861-38931682AA7D v7

Table 46. High speed distance protection ZMFPDIS, ZMFCPDIS

Function Range or value Accuracy

Number of zones 3 selectable -

directions, 3 fixed
directions

Minimum operate current, Ph- (5-6000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Ph and Ph-E

Positive sequence reactance (0.01 - 3000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp:

reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p ±2.0% of set value
Conditions:
Positive sequence resistance (0.00 - 1000.00)
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
reach, Ph-E and Ph-Ph loop ohm/p
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir Ramp of shots:
Zero sequence reactance reach (0.01 - 9000.00) Angle: At 0 degrees and 85 degrees ±2.0% of set value
ohm/p IEC 60255-121 points A,B,C,D,E Conditions:
IEC 60255-121 point B
Zero sequence resistive reach (0.00 - 3000.00)
ohm/p

Fault resistance reach, Ph-E (0.01 -9000.00)

and Ph-Ph ohm/l

Dynamic overreach < 5% at 85 degrees -

measured with CVTs
and 0.5 < SIR < 30,
IEC 60255-121

Reset ratio 105% typically -

Directional blinders Forward: -15 – 120 Pseudo continuous ramp:

degrees ±2.0 degrees, IEC 60255-121
Reverse: 165 – -60
degrees

Resistance determining the (0.01 - 5000.00) Pseudo continuous ramp: Ramp of shots:
load impedance area - forward ohm/p ±2.0% of set value ±5.0% of set value
Conditions: Conditions:
Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees Tested at ArgLd = 30 degrees

Angle determining the load 5 - 70 degrees Pseudo continuous ramp:

impedance area ±2.0 degrees
Conditions:
Tested at RLdFw = 20 ohm/p

Definite time delay to trip, Ph-E (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% of set value or ±35 ms whichever is greater
and Ph-Ph operation

Operate time 16 ms typically, IEC -

60255-121

Reset time at 0.1 to 2 x Zreach Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

88 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M16036-1 v10

Table 47. Power swing detection ZMRPSB

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reactive reach (0.10-3000.00) W/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85 degrees
Resistive reach (0.10–1000.00) W/loop

Power swing detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±10 ms whichever is greater

operate time

Second swing reclaim operate (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

time

Minimum operate current (5-30)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

SEMOD171935-5 v5

Table 48. Power swing logic PSLPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Permitted maximum (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

operating time difference
between higher and lower
zone

Delay for operation of (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

underreach zone with
detected difference in
operating time

Conditional timer for (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

sending the CS at power
swings

Conditional timer for (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

tripping at power swings

Timer for blocking the (0.000 — 60.0000) s ±0,2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
overreaching zones trip
GUID-88E02516-1BFE-4075-BEEB-027484814697 v2

Table 49. Pole slip protection PSPPPAM

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/Ir

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip (1 - 20) -

counters
SEMOD175136-2 v8

Table 50. Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impedance reach (0.00 - 1000.00)% of Zbase ±2.0% of Ur/(√3 ⋅ Ir)

Rotor start angle (90.0 - 130.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Rotor trip angle (15.0 - 90.0) degrees ±5.0 degrees

Zone 1 and Zone 2 trip (1 - 20) -

counters

ABB 89
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-BACA37F7-E945-40BC-BF9D-A65BFC96CA91 v8

Table 51. Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual voltage at 0.8 x Uset to
1.2 x Uset

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 x Uset to
0.8 x Uset

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a

90 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-42119BFF-1756-431C-A5A1-0AB637213E96 v1

Table 52. Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, phase-to-phase (1 - 100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

and phase-to-neutral
undervoltage

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate value, residual voltage (5 - 300)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, residual voltage > 95% -

Operate value, residual current (10 - 200)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual current at 0 to 2 x Iset

Independent time delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater
residual voltage at 0.8 to 1.2 x
Uset

Independent dropoff-delay for (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±25 ms whichever is greater

residual voltage at 1.2 to 0.8 x
Uset

Operating mode No Filter, NoPref

Cyclic: 1231c, 1321c
Acyclic: 123a, 132a, 213a, 231a, 312a, 321a
M16043-1 v12

Table 53. Automatic switch onto fault logic ZCVPSOF

Parameter Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±0.5% of Ur

UBase

Operate current, detection of dead line (1–100)% of ±1.0% of Ir

IBase

Time delay to operate for the switch onto fault (0.03-120.00) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
function

Time delay for UI detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

Delay time for activation of dead line detection (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

Drop-off delay time of switch onto fault function (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

ABB 91
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Wide area measurement system GUID-F0BAEBD8-E361-4D50-9737-7DF8B043D66A v4

Table 54. Protocol reporting via IEEE 1344 and C37.118 PMUREPORT

Influencing quantity Range Accuracy

Signal frequency ± 0.1 x fr ≤ 1.0% TVE

Signal magnitude:
Voltage phasor (0.1–1.2) x Ur
Current phasor (0.5–2.0) x Ir

Phase angle ± 180°

Harmonic distortion 10% from 2nd – 50th

Interfering signal:
Magnitude 10% of fundamental signal
Minimum frequency 0.1 x fr
Maximum frequency 1000 Hz

92 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Current protection M12336-1 v13

Table 55. Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -

Max. = 40 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

ABB 93
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12342-1 v21

Table 56. Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, step 1-4 (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of -

lBase

Minimum operate current, step 1-4 (1-10000)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (40.0–65.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operating angle (ROA) (40.0–89.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, step (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
1-4

Minimum operate time for inverse curves , (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1-4

Inverse time characteristics, see table 192, 16 curve types See table 192, table 194 and table 196
table 194 and table 196

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 15 ms -

2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Iset Min. = 20 ms -

to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Operate frequency, directional overcurrent 38-83 Hz -

Operate frequency, non-directional 10-90 Hz -

overcurrent

94 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12340-2 v9

Table 57. Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (5-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50–2500)% of lBase -

Operate time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Operate time at 0 to 10 x Min. = 5 ms -

Iset Max. = 15 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 25 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset -

Dynamic overreach < 5% at t = 100 ms -

ABB 95
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M15223-1 v18

Table 58. Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, step 1-4 (1-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

(RCA)

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1-4

Minimum operate time for inverse curves, (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
step 1-4

Inverse time characteristics, see Table 192, 16 curve types See Table 192, Table 194 and Table 196
Table 194 and Table 196

Second harmonic blocking (5–100)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Minimum polarizing current (2-100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Real part of source Z used for current (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

polarization

Imaginary part of source Z used for (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

current polarization

*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -

to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

*Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0 Max. = 30 ms

*Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

*Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

*Note: Operate time and reset time are only valid if harmonic blocking is turned off for a step.

96 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-E83AD807-8FE0-4244-A50E-86B9AF92469E v6

Table 59. Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent protection NS4PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, step 1 - 4 (1-2500)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (10-2500)% of -

IBase

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset, (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

step 1 - 4

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves, step 1 - 4

Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 192, table 194 and table 196
192, table 194 and table 196

Minimum operate current, step 1 - 4 (1.00 - 10000.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Relay characteristic angle (RCA) (-180 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Operate current for directional release (1–100)% of IBase For RCA ±60 degrees:
±2.5% of Ir at I ≤ Ir
±2.5% of I at I > Ir

Minimum polarizing voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Real part of negative sequence source (0.50-1000.00) W/phase -

impedance used for current
polarization

Imaginary part of negative sequence (0.50–3000.00) W/phase -

source impedance used for current
polarization

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 15 ms -

to 2 x Iset Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start non-directional at 0 Min. = 5 ms -

to 10 x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start non-directional at 10 x Min. = 20 ms -

Iset to 0 Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Transient overreach <10% at τ = 100 ms -

ABB 97
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD173350-2 v16

Table 60. Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection SDEPSDE

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate level for 3I0·cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

residual overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for ·3I0·3U0 cosj directional (0.25-200.00)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr

residual power ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Operate level for 3I0 and j residual (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non-directional (1.00-400.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Operate level for non-directional residual (1.00-200.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Residual release current for all directional (0.25-200.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

modes ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Residual release voltage for all directional (1.00-300.00)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U £ Ur

modes ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 65 ms

Reset time for non-directional residual Min. = 40 ms

overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 65 ms

Operate time for directional residual Min. = 110 ms

overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 160 ms

Reset time for directional residual Min. = 20 ms

overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0
Max. = 60 ms

Independent time delay for non- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
directional residual overvoltage at 0.8 x
Uset to 1.2 x Uset

Independent time delay for non- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 75 ms whichever is greater
directional residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x
Iset

Independent time delay for directional (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 170 ms whichever is greater
residual overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Iset

Inverse characteristics, see table 201, 16 curve types See Table 201, Table 202 and Table 203
Table 202 and Table 203

Relay characteristic angle (RCADir) (-179 to 180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (ROADir) (0 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

98 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12352-1 v15

Table 61. Thermal overload protection, one time constant LCPTTR/LFPTTR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Reference current (2-400)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reference temperature (0-300)°C, (0 - 600)°F ±1.0°C, ±2.0°F

Operate time: Time constant t = (1–1000) IEC 60255-149, ±5.0% or ±200 ms whichever is greater
minutes
 
 I , Ip
2 2 
t < σ ln  
 2 TTrip , TAmb 2 
I , T √ I ref

 ref 
EQUATION13000039 V3 EN-US (Equation 1)

TTrip= set operate temperature

TAmb = ambient temperature
Tref = temperature rise above ambient at Iref
Iref = reference load current
I = actual measured current
Ip = load current before overload occurs

Alarm temperature (0-200)°C, (0-400)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Operate temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

Reset level temperature (0-300)°C, (0-600)°F ±2.0°C, ±4.0°F

M12353-1 v15

Table 62. Breaker failure protection CCRBRF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate phase current (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, phase current > 95% -

Operate residual current (2-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, residual current > 95% -

Phase current level for blocking of contact (5-200)% of lBase ±1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir

function ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% -

Operate time for current detection 10 ms typically -

Reset time for current detection 10 ms maximum * -

Time delay for retrip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Time delay for backup trip at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Time delay for backup trip at multi-phase start (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 2 x Iset

Additional time delay for a second backup trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 2 x Iset

Time delay for alarm for faulty circuit breaker (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Minimum trip pulse duration (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±5 ms whichever is greater

* Valid for product version 2.2.3 or later

ABB 99
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12350-1 v12

Table 63. Stub protection STBPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating current (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-2500)% of IBase -

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

M13279-1 v10

Table 64. Pole discordance protection CCPDSC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (0–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ± 30 ms whichever is greater

between trip condition and
trip signal
SEMOD175152-2 v11

Table 65. Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP

Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr
where

S r = 1.732 × U r × I r

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2

Independent time delay to operate for (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Step 1 and Step 2 at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and
k=0.000

100 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD175159-2 v9

Table 66. Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP

Function Range or value Accuracy

Power level (0.0–500.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr at S ≤ Sr

for Step 1 and Step 2 ±1.0% of S at S > Sr

Characteristic angle (-180.0–180.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

for Step 1 and Step 2

Operate time, start at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and Min. =10 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Sr to 0.5 x Sr and Min. = 35 ms

k=0.000
Max. = 55 ms

Independent time delay to operate for (0.01-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
Step 1 and Step 2 at 0.5 x Sr to 2 x Sr and
k=0.000
SEMOD175200-2 v7

Table 67. Broken conductor check BRCPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum phase current for operation (5–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Unbalance current operation (50–90)% of maximum current ±1.0% of Ir

Independent operate time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

Independent reset time delay (0.010-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Start time at current change from Ir to 0 Min. = 25 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Reset time at current change from 0 to Min. = 5 ms -

Ir Max. = 20 ms

ABB 101
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-7EA9731A-8D56-4689-9072-D72D9CDFD795 v8

Table 68. Voltage-restrained time overcurrent protection VRPVOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start overcurrent (2.0 - 5000.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start overcurrent at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start overcurrent at 0 to 10 Min. = 5 ms -

x Iset Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start overcurrent at 10 x Iset to Min. = 20 ms -

0 Max. = 35 ms

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
2 x Iset

Inverse time characteristics, 13 curve types See tables 192 and 194
see tables 192 and 194

Minimum operate time for inverse time (0.00 - 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
characteristics

High voltage limit, voltage dependent (30.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur

operation

Start undervoltage (2.0 - 100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate time start undervoltage at 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

to 0
Max. = 30 ms

Reset time start undervoltage at 0 to 2 x Min. = 15 ms -

Uset
Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
undervoltage at 2 x Uset to 0

Internal low voltage blocking (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.25% of Ur

Overcurrent: -
Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

Undervoltage: -
Critical impulse time 10ms typically at 2 x Uset to 0
Impulse margin time 15 ms typically

102 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Voltage protection M13290-1 v15

Table 69. Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, low and high step (1.0–100.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Internal blocking level, step 1 and step (1–50)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

2

Inverse time characteristics for step 1 - See table 207

and step 2, see table 207

Definite time delay, step 1 at 1.2 x Uset (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
to 0

Definite time delay, step 2 at 1.2 x Uset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40ms whichever is greater
to 0

Minimum operate time, inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±0.5% or ±40ms whichever is greater

characteristics

Operate time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time 5 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

ABB 103
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M13304-1 v14

Table 70. Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1 and 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for steps 1 - See table 206

and 2, see table 206

Definite time delay, low step (step 1) at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset

Definite time delay, high step (step 2) at (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset

Minimum operate time, Inverse (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

characteristics

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x -

Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

104 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M13317-2 v14

Table 71. Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, step 1 - step 2 (1.0-200.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.0–50.0)% of UBase ± 0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

± 0.5% of U at U > Ur

Inverse time characteristics for low - See table 208

and high step, see table 208

Definite time delay low step (step 1) at (0.00–6000.00) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
0 to 1.2 x Uset

Definite time delay high step (step 2) (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater
at 0 to 1.2 x Uset

Minimum operate time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.2% or ± 45 ms whichever is greater

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Reset time, start at 1.2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

M13338-2 v11

Table 72. Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start (100–180)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Operate value, alarm (50–120)% of start level ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Operate value, high level (100–200)% of (UBase/frated) ±0.5% of U

Curve type IEEE or customer defined ±5.0 % or ±45 ms, whichever is greater

(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2

EQUATION1319 V1 EN-US (Equation 2)

where M = (E/f)/(Ur/fr)

Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function

Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater
function

Alarm time delay (0.00–9000.00) ±1.0% or ±45 ms, whichever is greater

ABB 105
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD166919-2 v7

Table 73. Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage difference for alarm and trip (2.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Under voltage level (1.0–100.0) % of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
differential alarm at 0.8 x UDAlarm to 1.2 x
UDAlarm

Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
differential trip at 0.8 x UDTrip to 1.2 x
UDTrip

Independent time delay for voltage (0.000–60.000)s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
differential reset at 1.2 x UDTrip to 0.8 x
UDTrip
SEMOD175210-2 v6

Table 74. Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage (1–100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Pulse timer when (0.050–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

disconnecting all three phases

Time delay for enabling the (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
functions after restoration

Operate time delay when (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

disconnecting all three phases

Time delay to block when all (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
three phase voltages are not
low
GUID-C172D5EB-51E8-4FC9-B2E7-EF976872FD7E v6

Table 75. Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Residual current detection (10 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio >95% at (50 - 150)% of IBase -

Operate time, residual current detection at Min. = 15 ms -

0 to 2 x Iset
Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, residual (0.000 - 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
current detection at 0 to 2 x Iset

Voltage based phase selection (30 - 100)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur

Reset ratio <115% -

Operate time, voltage-based phase Min. = 15 ms -

selection at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset
Max. = 30 ms

Independent time delay to operate, voltage- (0.000 – 60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
based phase selection at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x
Uset

106 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Frequency protection M13360-1 v15

Table 76. Underfrequency protection SAPTUF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function, at symmetrical (35.00-75.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

three phase voltage

Operate time, start at fset + 0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Min. = 80 ms

Hz fn = 50 Hz
Max. = 95 ms
-
Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms

Reset time, start at fset - 0.02 Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms

-
Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time function at fset + (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is greater
0.02 Hz to fset - 0.02 Hz

Reset time, definite time function at fset - 0.02 (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is greater
Hz to fset + 0.02 Hz

Voltage dependent time delay Settings: ±1.0% or ±100 ms whichever is greater

UNom=(50-150)% of Ubase
UMin=(50-150)% of Ubase
Exponent=0.0-5.0
tMax=(0.010–60.000)s
tMin=(0.010–60.000)s

Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû
EQUATION1182 V1 EN-US (Equation 3)

U=Umeasured
M14964-1 v12

Table 77. Overfrequency protection SAPTOF

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function at symmetrical three-phase voltage (35.00-90.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

Operate time, start at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz Min. = 80 ms -

fn = 50Hz
Max. = 95 ms

Min. = 65 ms
fn = 60 Hz
Max. = 80 ms

Reset time, start at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, definite time function at fset -0.02 Hz to fset +0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±100 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time, definite time function at fset +0.02 Hz to fset -0.02 Hz (0.000-60.000)s ±0.2% ±120 ms,
whichever is greater

ABB 107
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M14976-1 v10

Table 78. Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, start function (-10.00-10.00) Hz/s ±10.0 mHz/s

Operate value, restore enable frequency (45.00-65.00) Hz ±2.0 mHz

Definite restore time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

greater

Definite time delay for frequency gradient trip (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±120 ms whichever is
greater

Definite reset time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is

greater

108 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Multipurpose protection M13095-2 v11

Table 79. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Measuring current input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph

Measuring voltage input phase1, phase2, phase3, PosSeq, - -

NegSeq, -3*ZeroSeq, MaxPh,
MinPh, UnbalancePh, phase1-
phase2, phase2-phase3, phase3-
phase1, MaxPh-Ph, MinPh-Ph,
UnbalancePh-Ph

Start overcurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 5000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Start undercurrent, step 1 - 2 (2 - 150)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Independent time delay, overcurrent at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
0 to 2 x Iset, step 1 - 2

Independent time delay, undercurrent (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
at 2 x Iset to 0, step 1 - 2

Overcurrent (non-directional):

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Start time at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 5 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

Reset time at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Undercurrent:

Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Overcurrent:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 16 curve types See table 192, 194 and table 196
192, 194 and table 196

Overcurrent:

Minimum operate time for inverse (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
curves, step 1 - 2

Voltage level where voltage memory (0.0 - 5.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

takes over

Start overvoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

ABB 109
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 79. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued

Function Range or value Accuracy

Start undervoltage, step 1 - 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Independent time delay, overvoltage at (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset, step 1 - 2

Independent time delay, undervoltage (0.00 - 6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset, step 1 - 2

Overvoltage:

Start time at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Undervoltage:

Start time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Overvoltage:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 4 curve types See table 206
206

Undervoltage:

Inverse time characteristics, see table 3 curve types See table 207
207

High and low voltage limit, voltage (1.0 - 200.0)% of UBase ±1.0% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
dependent operation, step 1 - 2 ±1.0% of U at U > Ur

Directional function Settable: NonDir, forward and -

reverse

Relay characteristic angle (-180 to +180) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Relay operate angle (1 to 90) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% -

Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% -

Reset ratio, overvoltage > 95% -

Reset ratio, undervoltage < 105% -

Operate frequency 10-90 Hz -

Overcurrent:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undercurrent:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Overvoltage:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset

110 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 79. General current and voltage protection CVGAPC, continued

Function Range or value Accuracy

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

Undervoltage:

Critical impulse time 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset

Impulse margin time 15 ms typically -

ABB 111
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Secondary system supervision M12358-1 v10

Table 80. Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (10-200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±10.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Operate current >90%

Block current (20-500)% of IBase ±5.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±5.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, Block current >90% at (50-500)% of IBase

M16069-1 v12

Table 81. Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate voltage, zero sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, zero sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage, negative sequence (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate current, negative sequence (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate voltage change level (1-100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Ur

Operate current change level (1–100)% of IBase ±10.0% of Ir

Operate phase voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate phase dead line voltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Operate phase dead line current (1–100)% of IBase ±0.5% of Ir

Operate time, start, 1 ph, at 1 x Ur to 0 Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start, 1 ph, at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

112 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-E2EA8017-BB4B-48B0-BEDA-E71FEE353774 v5

Table 82. Fuse failure supervision VDSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, block of main fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio <110%

Operate time, block of main fuse failure at 1 x Ur Min. = 5 ms –

to 0
Max. = 15 ms

Reset time, block of main fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Ur Min. = 15 ms –

Max. = 30 ms

Operate value, alarm for pilot fuse failure (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio <110% –

Operate time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 1 x Ur Min. = 5 ms –

to 0
Max. = 15 ms

Reset time, alarm for pilot fuse failure at 0 to 1 x Min. = 15 ms –

Ur
Max. = 30 ms
GUID-DAECF9F5-1D0B-43FC-AD29-8F96E05DD0DA v3

Table 83. Voltage based delta supervision DELVSPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum Voltage (5.0 - 50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

DelU> (2.0 - 500.0)% of UBase Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous

2 cycle mode:±20% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±20% of U at U > UrRMS & DFT Mag
mode:±10% of Ur at U ≤ Ur±10% of U
at U > Ur

DelUAng> (2.0 - 40.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Operate time for Instantaneous 1 cycle & Instantaneous

changeat Ur to (Ur + 2 x 2 cycle mode - <20msRMS & DFT Mag
DelU>)at Ur to (Ur + 5 x mode - <30ms
DelU>)

Operate time for jump Vector shift mode - <60ms

from Zero degrees to
'AngStVal' + 2 degrees
GUID-ED3FE722-1F29-4340-94E9-6C907C4474F2 v3

Table 84. Current based delta supervision DELISPVC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Minimum current (5.0 - 50.0)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±1.0% of I at I > Ir

DelI> (10.0 - 500.0)% of IBase Instantaneous 1 cycle &

Instantaneous 2 cycle mode:±20% of
Ir at I ≤ Ir±20% of I at I > IrRMS & DFT
Mag mode:±10% of Ir at I ≤ Ir±10% of
I at I > Ir

Second harmonic blocking (5.0 - 100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Third harmonic restraining (5.0 - 100.0)% of fundamental ±2.0% of Ir

Operate time for changeat Instantaneous 1 cycle &

Ir to (Ir + 2 x DelI>)at Ir to Instantaneous 2 cycle mode - <20ms
(Ir + 5 x DelI>) RMS & DFT Mag mode - <30ms

ABB 113
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Control M12359-1 v15

Table 85. Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check SESRSYN

Function Range or value Accuracy

Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -

Voltage high limit for synchronizing and synchrocheck (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur
±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, synchrocheck > 95% -

Frequency difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (0.003-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Phase angle difference limit between bus and line for synchrocheck (5.0-90.0) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Voltage difference limit between bus and line for synchronizing and (0.02-0.5) p.u ±0.5% of Ur
synchrocheck

Time delay output for synchrocheck when angle difference between (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to “PhaseDiff” - 2 greater
degrees

Frequency difference minimum limit for synchronizing (0.003-0.250) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Frequency difference maximum limit for synchronizing (0.050-1.000) Hz ±2.5 mHz

Maximum closing angle between bus and line for synchronizing (15-30) degrees ±2.0 degrees

Breaker closing pulse duration (0.050-1.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is

greater

tMaxSynch, which resets synchronizing function if no close has been (0.000-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is
made before set time greater

Minimum time to accept synchronizing conditions (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

greater

Voltage high limit for energizing check (50.0-120.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, voltage high limit > 95% -

Voltage low limit for energizing check (10.0-80.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

Reset ratio, voltage low limit < 105% -

Maximum voltage for energizing (50.0-180.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Time delay for energizing check when voltage jumps from 0 to 90% (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is
of Urated greater

Operate time for synchrocheck function when angle difference Min. = 15 ms –

between bus and line jumps from “PhaseDiff” + 2 degrees to Max. = 30 ms
“PhaseDiff” - 2 degrees

Operate time for energizing function when voltage jumps from 0 to Min. = 70 ms –
90% of Urated Max. = 90 ms

114 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12379-1 v13

Table 86. Autorecloser SMBRREC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Dead time:
shot 1 “t1 1Ph” (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
shot 1 “t1 2Ph” whichever is greater
shot 1 “t1 3Ph “
shot 1 “t1 3PhHS”

Dead time: (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms

shot 2 “t2 3Ph” whichever is greater
shot 3 “t3 3Ph”
shot 4 “t4 3Ph”
shot 5 “t5 3Ph”

Extend three-phase dead time duration “tExtended t1” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater

Minimum time that circuit breaker must be closed before new sequence is allowed (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
“tCBClosedMin” whichever is greater

Wait time for the slave to close when WAIT input has reset “tSlaveDeadTime” (0.100-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum allowed start pulse duration “tLongStartInh” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

whichever is greater

Circuit breaker closing pulse duration “tPulse” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

whichever is greater

Reclaim time ”tReclaim” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms

whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for release from master “tWaitForMaster” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms
whichever is greater

Reset time for reclosing inhibit “tInhibit” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms

whichever is greater

Wait time after close command before proceeding to next shot “tAutoContWait” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for fulfilled synchrocheck conditions “tSync” (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
whichever is greater

Delay time before indicating successful reclosing “tSuccessful” (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±50 ms
whichever is greater

Maximum wait time for circuit breaker closing before indicating unsuccessful (0.00-6000.00) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms
“tUnsucCl” whichever is greater

ABB 115
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Scheme communication M16038-1 v14

Table 87. Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Off -

Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
DeltaBlocking

Operate voltage, Delta U (0–100)% of UBase ±5.0% of ΔU

Operate current, Delta I (0–200)% of IBase ±5.0% of ΔI

Operate zero sequence voltage, (0–100)% of UBase ±10.0% of Δ3U0

Delta 3U0

Operate zero sequence current, (0–200)% of IBase ±10.0% of Δ3I0

Delta 3I0

Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme

Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

send signal

Security timer for loss of guard (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater
signal detection

Operation mode of unblocking Off -

logic NoRestart
Restart
SEMOD166936-2 v7

Table 88. Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection ZC1PPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Intertrip -

Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking

Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

communication scheme

Minimum duration of a carrier (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

send signal
M16039-1 v16

Table 89. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection ZCRWPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Detection level phase-to- (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

neutral voltage

Detection level phase-to-phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage

Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

reversal logic

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic

116 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD166938-2 v6

Table 90. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication ZC1WPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Detection level phase to (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

neutral voltage

Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

voltage

Reset ratio <105% at (20-90)% of UBase -

Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

reversal

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak- (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic
M16049-1 v10

Table 91. Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection ECPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Scheme type Permissive Underreaching -

Permissive Overreaching
Blocking

Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is greater

coordination time
GUID-CC9A02C2-AAE8-4B8C-A091-D4ED584A2EA7 v1

Table 92. Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current, LoadCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Operate current, MinCurr (1–100)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Delay time on pick-up for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Delay time on drop-off for current release (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

Delay time on pick-up for MinCurr value (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater
M16051-2 v11

Table 93. Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection ECRWPSCH

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate mode of WEI logic Off -

Echo
Echo & Trip

Operate voltage 3U0 for WEI (5-70)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur

trip

Operate time for current (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

reversal logic

Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

Coordination time for weak- (0.000–60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

end infeed logic

ABB 117
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Direct transfer trip

GUID-B5714FAE-A87D-4C2D-A167-6CB3522CE1D5 v5

Table 94. Low active power and power factor protection LAPPGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, low active power (2.0-100.0)% of SBase ±1.0% of Sr

Reset ratio, low active power <105% -

Operate value, low power factor 0.00-1.00 ±0.02

Independent time delay to operate for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
low active power at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 x
Pset

Independent time delay to operate for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater
low power factor at 1.2 x PFset to 0.8 x
PFset

Critical impulse time, low active power 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Pset to 0.8 -
x Pset

Impulse margin time, low active power 10 ms typically -

GUID-D9EADF1B-5FC7-4FDB-BF38-95BDBC4D7C3D v5

Table 95. Compensated over- and undervoltage protection COUVGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, undervoltage (1-100)% of UBase ±0,5% of Ur

Absolute hysteresis (0.00–50.0)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Critical impulse time, undervoltage 10 ms typically at 1.2 x Uset to 0.8 x -

Uset

Impulse margin time, undervoltage 15 ms typically -

Operate value, overvoltage (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

± 0.5% of U at U>Ur

Critical impulse time, overvoltage 10 ms typically at 0.8 x Uset to 1.2 x -

Uset

Impulse margin time, overvoltage 15 ms typically -

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

undervoltage functionality at 1.2 x
Uset to 0.8 x Uset

Independent time delay for (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

overvoltage functionality at 0.8 x
Uset to 1.2 x Uset
GUID-4BF21D95-4517-424E-BC23-6156EA0E253C v4

Table 96. Sudden change in current variation SCCVPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, overcurrent (5-100)% of IBase ±2.0% of Ir

Hold time for operate signal at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is
greater

118 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-C99E063D-B377-40D5-8481-9F46D4166AED v3

Table 97. Carrier receive logic LCCRPTRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operation mode 1 Out Of 2 -

2 Out Of 2

Independent time delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is

greater
GUID-122A206E-27D2-4D15-AD5A-86B68F1ED559 v5

Table 98. Negative sequence overvoltage protection LCNSPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, negative sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U≤Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U>Ur

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

overvoltage

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, negative 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

sequence overvoltage

Impulse margin time, negative 15 ms typically -

sequence overvoltage

Independent time delay to operate at (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

0 to 1.2 x Uset
GUID-7A8E7F49-F079-42A0-8685-20288FAD5982 v5

Table 99. Zero sequence overvoltage protection LCZSPTOV

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, zero sequence (1-200)% of UBase ±0.5% of Ur at U ≤ Ur

overvoltage ±0.5% of U at U > Ur

Reset ratio, zero sequence overvoltage >95% at (10–200)% of UBase -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Uset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Uset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Uset -

overvoltage

Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overvoltage

Independent time delay to operate at (0.000-120.000) s ±0.2% or ±40 ms whichever is greater

0 to 1.2 x Uset

ABB 119
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-0E964441-43DE-43B6-B454-485FBBF66B5C v5

Table 100. Negative sequence overcurrent protection LCNSPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, negative sequence (3 - 2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, negative sequence >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

overcurrent

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, negative sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, negative sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms, whichever is greater

Transient overreach, start function <10% at τ = 100 ms -

GUID-9F739808-04CA-4988-ABBC-1A444297FDB5 v5

Table 101. Zero sequence overcurrent protection LCZSPTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, zero sequence (3-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I≤Ir

overcurrent ±1.0% of I at I>Ir

Reset ratio, zero sequence overcurrent >95% at (50–2500)% of IBase -

Operate time, start at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time, start at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Operate time, start at 0 to 10 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 20 ms

Reset time, start at 10 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, zero sequence 10 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

overcurrent 2 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, zero sequence 15 ms typically -

overcurrent

Independent time delay at 0 to 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±35 ms whichever is greater

120 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-C4ACE306-2A54-483D-B247-A479D48CBF5F v5

Table 102. Three phase overcurrent LCP3PTOC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, overcurrent (5-2500)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio, overcurrent > 95% at (50-2500)% of -

IBase

Start time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Reset time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 20 ms -

Max. = 35 ms

Critical impulse time, overcurrent 3 ms typically at 0 to 2 x Iset -

1 ms typically at 0 to 10 x Iset

Impulse margin time, overcurrent 10 ms typically -

Independent time delay to operate at 0 to (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater

2 x Iset
GUID-CE2C6F0A-DF49-4AAF-80F0-9CDCBB08E755 v5

Table 103. Three phase undercurrent LCP3PTUC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate value, undercurrent (1.00-100.00)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir

Reset ratio, undercurrent < 105% at (50.00-100.00)% of -

IBase

Start time at 2 x Iset to 0 Min. = 15 ms -

Max. = 30 ms

Reset time at 0 to 2 x Iset Min. = 10 ms -

Max. = 25 ms

Critical impulse time, undercurrent 10 ms typically at 2 x Iset to 0 -

Impulse margin time, undercurrent 10 ms typically -

Independent time delay to operate at 2 x Iset (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±45 ms whichever is greater
to 0

ABB 121
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Logic M12380-1 v14

Table 104. Tripping logic common 3-phase output SMPPTRC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Trip action 3-ph, 1/3-ph, 1/2/3-ph -

Minimum trip pulse length (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

3-pole trip delay (0.020-0.500) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

Evolving fault delay (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±15 ms whichever is greater

GUID-1E1A829D-1F26-433A-8813-1F5A6F225418 v1

Table 105. Number of SMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SMAGAPC 12 - -

Table 106. Number of STARTCOMB instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

STARTCOMB 32 - -
GUID-3AB1EE95-51BF-4CC4-99BD-F4ECDAACB75A v3

Table 107. Number of TMAGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TMAGAPC 6 6 -
GUID-A05AF26F-DC98-4E62-B96B-E75D19F20767 v2

Table 108. Number of ALMCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ALMCALH - - 5
GUID-70B7357D-F467-4CF5-9F73-641A82D334F5 v2

Table 109. Number of WRNCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

WRNCALH - - 5
GUID-EAA43288-01A5-49CF-BF5B-9ABF6DC27D85 v2

Table 110. Number of INDCALH instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDCALH - 5 -

122 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-D1179280-1D99-4A66-91AC-B7343DBA9F23 v3

Table 111. Number of AND instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

AND 60 60 160
GUID-45DF373F-DC39-4E1B-B45B-6B454E8E0E50 v3

Table 112. Number of GATE instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

GATE 10 10 20
GUID-0EC4192A-EF03-47C0-AEC1-09B68B411A98 v3

Table 113. Number of INV instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INV 90 90 240
GUID-B2E6F510-8766-4381-9618-CE02ED71FFB6 v2

Table 114. Number of LLD instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

LLD 10 10 20
GUID-35A795D7-A6BD-4669-A023-43C497DBFB01 v4

Table 115. Number of OR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

OR 100 60 160
GUID-E05E5FB1-23E7-4816-84F2-1FBFFDFF2B43 v2

Table 116. Number of PULSETIMER instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

PULSETIMER 10 10 20 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-BE6FD540-E96E-4F15-B2A2-12FFAE6C51DB v2

Table 117. Number of RSMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-7A0F4327-CA83-4FB0-AB28-7C5F17AE6354 v2

Table 118. Number of SRMEMORY instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SRMEMORY 10 10 20

ABB 123
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-C6C98FE0-F559-45EE-B853-464516775417 v3

Table 119. Number of TIMERSET instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TIMERSET 15 15 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-0B07F78C-10BD-4070-AFF0-6EE36454AA03 v2

Table 120. Number of XOR instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

XOR 10 10 20
GUID-23D4121A-4C9A-4072-BBE3-6DB076EDAB79 v1

Table 121. Number of ANDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ANDQT - 20 100
GUID-27DF23C0-A0B2-4BB0-80B5-FC7B7F7FE448 v1

Table 122. Number of INDCOMBSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDCOMBSPQT - 10 10
GUID-C1E61AE5-22CF-4198-97CF-8C8043EE96D2 v1

Table 123. Number of INDEXTSPQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INDEXTSPQT - 10 10
GUID-77FEBE9B-0882-4E85-8B1A-7671807BFC02 v2

Table 124. Number of INVALIDQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INVALIDQT 10 6 6
GUID-F25B94C6-9CC9-48A0-A7A3-47627D2B56E2 v1

Table 125. Number of INVERTERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INVERTERQT - 20 100
GUID-88B27B3C-26D2-47AF-9878-CC19018171B1 v1

Table 126. Number of ORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ORQT - 20 100

124 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-61263951-53A8-4113-82B5-3DB3BF0D9449 v1

Table 127. Number of PULSETIMERQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

PULSETIMERQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-94C803B4-6C5A-4072-AB5C-20DDE98C9A70 v1

Table 128. Number of RSMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

RSMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-341562FB-6149-495B-8A63-200DF16A5590 v1

Table 129. Number of SRMEMORYQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SRMEMORYQT - 10 30
GUID-B6231B97-05ED-40E8-B735-1E1A50FDB85F v1

Table 130. Number of TIMERSETQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time Range or Value Accuracy

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TIMERSETQT - 10 30 (0.000–90000.000) s ±0.5% ±10 ms

GUID-1C381E02-6B9E-44DC-828F-8B3EA7EDAA54 v1

Table 131. Number of XORQT instances

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

XORQT - 10 30

ABB 125
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-19810098-1820-4765-8F0B-7D585FFC0C78 v8

Table 132. Number of instances in the extension logic package

Logic block Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

SLGAPC 10 10 54

VSGAPC 10 10 100

AND 80 40 100

OR 80 40 100

PULSETIMER 20 20 49

GATE — — 49

TIMERSET 34 30 49

XOR 10 10 69

LLD — — 49

SRMEMORY 10 10 110

INV 80 40 100

RSMEMORY 10 10 20
GUID-65A2876A-F779-41C4-ACD7-7662D1E7F1F2 v3

Table 133. Number of B16I instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

B16I 6 4 8
GUID-3820F464-D296-4CAD-8491-F3F997359D79 v2

Table 134. Number of BTIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

BTIGAPC 4 4 8
GUID-B45901F4-B163-4696-8220-7F8CAC84D793 v2

Table 135. Number of IB16 instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

IB16 6 4 8
GUID-A339BBA3-8FD0-429D-BB49-809EAC4D53B0 v2

Table 136. Number of ITBGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

ITBGAPC 4 4 8

126 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-B258726E-1129-47C9-94F9-BE634A2085FA v4

Table 137. Elapsed time integrator with limit transgression and overflow supervision TEIGAPC

Function Cycle time (ms) Range or value Accuracy

Elapsed time integration 3 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±20 ms whichever is

greater

8 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±100 ms whichever is

greater

100 0 ~ 999999.9 s ±0.2% or ±250 ms whichever is

greater

Table 138. Number of TEIGAPC instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

TEIGAPC 4 4 4
GUID-CEA332FF-838D-42B7-AEFC-C1E87809825E v3

Table 139. Number of INTCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

INTCOMP 10 10 10
GUID-3FDD7677-1D86-42AD-A545-B66081C49B47 v4

Table 140. Number of REALCOMP instances

Function Quantity with cycle time

3 ms 8 ms 100 ms

REALCOMP 10 10 10

ABB 127
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Monitoring M12386-1 v16

Table 141. Power system measurement CVMMXN

Function Range or value Accuracy

Frequency (0.95-1.05) x fr ±2.0 mHz

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.3% of U at U≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U> 50 V

Current (0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.8% of I at 0.1 x Ir< I < 0.2 x Ir

± 0.5% of I at 0.2 x Ir< I < 0.5 x Ir
±0.2% of I at 0.5 x Ir< I < 4.0 x Ir

Active power, P (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of P

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ> 0.7

Reactive power, Q (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S > 0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of Q

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
cos φ< 0.7

Apparent power, S (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of Sr at S ≤0.5 x Sr

(0.1-4.0) x Ir ±0.5% of S at S >0.5 x Sr

(100 to 220) V ±0.2% of S

(0.5-2.0) x Ir

Power factor, cos (φ) (10 to 300) V <0.02

(0.1-4.0) x Ir

(100 to 220) V <0.01

(0.5-2.0) x Ir
GUID-5E04B3F9-E1B7-4974-9C0B-DE9CD4A2408F v6

Table 142. Current measurement CMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Current at symmetrical load (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle at symmetrical (0.1-4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

load ±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-374C2AF0-D647-4159-8D3A-71190FE3CFE0 v5

Table 143. Voltage measurement phase-phase VMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V

128 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-ED634B6D-9918-464F-B6A4-51B78129B819 v6

Table 144. Voltage measurement phase-earth VNMMXU

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage (5 to 175) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (5 to 175) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
GUID-9B8A7FA5-9C98-4CBD-A162-7112869CF030 v5

Table 145. Current sequence measurement CMSQI

Function Range or value Accuracy

Current positive sequence, I1 (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current zero sequence, 3I0 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Current negative sequence, I2 (0.1–1.0) × Ir ±0.3% of Ir at I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

Three phase settings ±0.3% of I at I > 0.5 × Ir

Phase angle (0.1–4.0) × Ir ±1.0 degrees at 0.1 × Ir < I ≤ 0.5 × Ir

±0.5 degrees at 0.5 × Ir < I ≤ 4.0 × Ir
GUID-47094054-A828-459B-BE6A-D7FA1B317DA7 v6

Table 146. Voltage sequence measurement VMSQI

Function Range or value Accuracy

Voltage positive sequence, U1 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage zero sequence, 3U0 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Voltage negative sequence, U2 (10 to 300) V ±0.5% of U at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2% of U at U > 50 V

Phase angle (10 to 300) V ±0.5 degrees at U ≤ 50 V

±0.2 degrees at U > 50 V
M16080-1 v5

Table 147. Supervision of mA input signals

Function Range or value Accuracy

mA measuring function ±5, ±10, ±20 mA ±0.1 % of set value ±0.005 mA

0-5, 0-10, 0-20, 4-20 mA

Max current of transducer (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

to input

Min current of transducer to (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

input

Alarm level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

Warning level for input (-20.00 to +20.00) mA

Alarm hysteresis for input (0.0-20.0) mA

ABB 129
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12760-1 v11

Table 148. Disturbance report DRPRDRE

Function Range or value Accuracy

Pre-fault time (0.05–9.90) s -

Post-fault time (0.1–10.0) s -

Limit time (0.5–10.0) s -

Maximum number of recordings 100, first in - first out -

Time tagging resolution 1 ms See table 187

Maximum number of analog inputs 30 + 10 (external + internally -

derived)

Maximum number of binary inputs 352 -

Maximum number of phasors in the Trip Value recorder per recording 30 -

Maximum number of indications in a disturbance report 352 -

Maximum number of events in the Event recording per recording 150 -

Maximum number of events in the Event list 1000, first in - first out -

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum number 340 seconds (100 recordings) -
of channels, typical value) at 50 Hz, 280 seconds (80
recordings) at 60 Hz

Sampling rate 1 kHz at 50 Hz -

1.2 kHz at 60 Hz

Recording bandwidth (5-300) Hz -

GUID-F034B396-6600-49EF-B0A5-8ED96766A6A0 v8

Table 149. Insulation supervision for gas medium function SSIMG

Function Range or value Accuracy

Pressure alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Pressure lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for pressure alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for pressure lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

130 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-83B0F607-D898-403A-94FD-7FE8D45C73FF v8

Table 150. Insulation supervision for liquid medium function SSIML

Function Range or value Accuracy

Oil alarm level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Oil lockout level 1.00-100.00 ±10.0% of set value

Temperature alarm level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Temperature lockout level -40.00-200.00 ±2.5% of set value

Time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for oil alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for oil lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Reset time delay for temperature alarm (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater

Time delay for temperature lockout (0.000-60.000) s ±0.2% or ±250ms whichever is greater
GUID-B6799420-D726-460E-B02F-C7D4F1937432 v9

Table 151. Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Alarm level for open and close travel time (0 – 200) ms ±3 ms

Alarm level for number of operations (0 – 9999) -

Independent time delay for spring charging (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
time alarm

Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
alarm

Independent time delay for gas pressure (0.00 – 60.00) s ±0.2% or ±30 ms whichever is greater
lockout

CB Contact Travel Time, opening and ±3 ms

closing

Remaining Life of CB ±2 operations

Accumulated Energy ±1.0% or ±0.5 whichever is greater

M14987-1 v6

Table 152. Fault locator LMBRFLO

Function Value or range Accuracy

Reactive and resistive reach (0.001-1500.000) Ω/phase ±2.0% static accuracy

Conditions:
Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir

Phase selection According to input signals -

Maximum number of fault 100 -

locations

ABB 131
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12700-1 v4

Table 153. Event list

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in the list 1000

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on time synchronizing

M13765-1 v5

Table 154. Indications

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of indications presented for single disturbance 352

Maximum number of recorded disturbances 100

M12702-1 v4

Table 155. Event recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of events in disturbance report 150

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Resolution 1 ms

Accuracy Depending on time

synchronizing
M13747-1 v5

Table 156. Trip value recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 30

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

M12384-1 v7

Table 157. Disturbance recorder

Function Value

Buffer capacity Maximum number of analog inputs 40

Maximum number of binary inputs 352

Maximum number of disturbance reports 100

Maximum total recording time (3.4 s recording time and maximum 340 seconds (100 recordings) at 50 Hz
number of channels, typical value) 280 seconds (80 recordings) at 60 Hz
GUID-C43B8654-60FE-4E20-8328-754C238F4AD0 v3

Table 158. Event counter with limit supervision L4UFCNT

Function Range or value Accuracy

Counter value 0-65535 -

Max. count up speed 30 pulses/s (50% duty cycle) -

132 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-F5E124E3-0B85-41AC-9830-A2362FD289F2 v1

Table 159. Running hour-meter TEILGAPC

Function Range or value Accuracy

Time limit for alarm supervision, tAlarm (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value

Time limit for warning supervision, (0 - 99999.9) hours ±0.1% of set value
tWarning

Time limit for overflow supervision Fixed to 99999.9 hours ±0.1%

GUID-3763D0D6-AD44-4C9B-91E4-050C0B63C7EA v1

Table 160. Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operate current (50-1000)% of IBase ±1.0% of Ir at I ≤ Ir

±1.0% of I at I > Ir

Reset ratio > 95% at (50-1000)% of IBase –

GUID-09EC65AC-C60B-4256-A601-FE2CC90D26EC v1

Table 161. Current harmonic monitoring CHMMHAI (50/60 Hz)

Function Range or value Accuracy

Fundamental Harmonic

Frequency (0.95 - 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 2 mHz

True RMS (0.1 to 1) X Ir None ± 0.5%

1 X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 2%

Fundamental (0.1 to 1) X Ir None ± 0.5%

1 X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 0.5%

Crest Factor (0.1 to 1) X Ir None ± 2%

Harmonic (0.1 to 1) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 5%

Amplitude

Total Demand (0.1 to 1) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 6%

Distortion (TDD)

Total Harmonic (0.1 to 1) X Ir 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X Ir ± 6%

Distortion (ITHD)

ABB 133
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-2068BBA0-9026-48D0-9DEB-301BCB3C600C v1

Table 162. Voltage harmonic monitoring VHMMHAI (50/60 Hz)

Function Range or value Accuracy

Fundamental Harmonic

Frequency (0.95 - 1.05) X fr 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X V ± 2 mHz

True RMS (10 to 150) V None ± 0.5%

(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X V ± 2%

Fundamental (10 to 150) V None ± 0.5%

(10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X V ± 0.5%

Crest Factor (10 to 150) V None ± 2%

Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X V ± 4%

Amplitude

Total Harmonic (10 to 150) V 2nd order to 5th order (0.1 - 0.5) X V ± 4%
Distortion
(VTHD)

134 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Metering M13404-2 v5

Table 163. Pulse-counter logic PCFCNT

Function Setting range Accuracy

Input frequency See Binary Input Module (BIM) -

Cycle time for report of (1–3600) s -

counter value
SEMOD153707-2 v5

Table 164. Function for energy calculation and demand handling ETPMMTR

Function Range or value Accuracy

Energy metering kWh Export/Import, kvarh Input from MMXU. No extra error at steady load
Export/Import

ABB 135
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Station communication M15031-1 v9

Table 165. Communication protocols

Function Value

Protocol IEC 61850-8-1

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

Protocol IEC 60870–5–103

Communication speed for the IEDs 9600 or 19200 Bd

Protocol DNP3.0

Communication speed for the IEDs 300–115200 Bd

Protocol TCP/IP, Ethernet

Communication speed for the IEDs 100 Mbit/s

Protocol LON

Communication speed for the IEDs 1.25 Mbit/s

Protocol SPA

Communication speed for the IEDs 300–38400 Bd

GUID-E8B5405C-241C-4DC2-8AB1-3FA77343A4DE v2

Table 166. IEC 61850-9-2 communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 61850-9-2

Communication speed for the IEDs 100BASE-FX

M11927-1 v2

Table 167. LON communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol LON

Communication speed 1.25 Mbit/s

M11901-1 v2

Table 168. SPA communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol SPA

Communication speed 300, 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, 19200 or 38400 Bd

Slave number 1 to 899

M11921-1 v4

Table 169. IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol

Function Value

Protocol IEC 60870-5-103

Communication speed 9600, 19200 Bd

136 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12589-1 v4

Table 170. SLM – LON port

Quantity Range or value

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000 ft typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (10m/35ft typically *)

Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

SEMOD117441-2 v5

Table 171. SLM – SPA/IEC 60870-5-103/DNP3 port

Quantity Range or value

Optical connector Glass fiber: type ST

Plastic fiber: type HFBR snap-in

Fiber, optical budget Glass fiber: 11 dB (1000m/3000ft m typically *)

Plastic fiber: 7 dB (25m/80ft m typically *)

Fiber diameter Glass fiber: 62.5/125 mm

Plastic fiber: 1 mm

*) depending on optical budget calculation

SEMOD158710-2 v2

Table 172. Galvanic RS485 communication module

Quantity Range or value

Communication speed 2400–19200 bauds

External connectors RS-485 6-pole connector

Soft ground 2-pole connector
SEMOD55310-2 v13

Table 173. SFP - Optical ethernet port

Quantity Rated value

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for
communication using any protocol

Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-FX

Type of fiber 62.5/125 mm multimode fiber

Wave length 1310 nm, Class 1 laser safety

Optical connector Type LC

Communication speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

ABB 137
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 174. SFP - Galvanic RJ45

Quantity Rated value

Number of channels Up to 6 single or 3 redundant or a combination of single and redundant links for
communication using any protocol

Standard IEEE 802.3u 100BASE-TX

Type of cable Cat5e FTP

Connector Type RJ45

Communication Speed Fast Ethernet 100 Mbit/s

GUID-8651FF22-C007-4D53-B7E3-686A30F37CB6 v6

Table 175. Ethernet redundancy protocols, IEC 62439-3

Function Value

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.1 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-0)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 Parallel Redundancy Protocol (PRP-1)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Protocol IEC 62439-3 Ed.2 High-availability Seamless Redundancy (HSR)

Communication speed 100Base-FX

Connectors Optical, type LC

138 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

M12756-1 v12

Remote communication

Table 176. Line data communication module

Characteristic Range or value

Type of LDCM Short range (SR) Medium range (MR) Long range (LR)

Type of fiber Multi-mode fiber Single-mode fiber Single-mode fiber

glass 62.5/125 µm glass 9/125 µm glass 9/125 µm

Multi-mode fiber
glass 50/125 µm

Peak Emission Wave length

Nominal 820 nm 1310 nm 1550 nm
Maximum 865 nm 1330 nm 1580 nm
Minimum 792 nm 1290 nm 1520 nm

Optical budget 18.8 dB (typical 26.8 dB (typical 28.7 dB (typical

Multi-mode fiber glass 62.5/125 mm distance about 3 distance 80 km/50 distance 120 km/68
km/2 mile *) mile *) mile *)

Multi-mode fiber glass 50/125 mm 11.5 dB (typical

distance about 2
km/1 mile *)

Optical connector Type ST Type FC/PC Type FC/PC

Protocol C37.94 C37.94 C37.94

implementation **) implementation **)

Data transmission Synchronous Synchronous Synchronous

Transmission rate / Data rate 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s 2 Mbit/s / 64 kbit/s

Clock source Internal or derived Internal or derived Internal or derived

from received from received from received signal
signal signal

*) depending on optical budget calculation

**) C37.94 originally defined just for multi-mode; using same header, configuration and data format as C37.94
GUID-83EC40D0-ABCF-4292-B3DF-155C3A556B76 v4

Table 177. Galvanic X.21 line data communication module (X.21-LDCM)

Quantity Range or value

Connector, X.21 Micro D-sub, 15-pole male, 1.27 mm (0.050") pitch

Connector, ground selection 2 pole screw terminal

Standard CCITT X21

Communication speed 64 kbit/s

Insulation 1 kV

Maximum cable length 10 m

ABB 139
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Hardware
IED
M11778-1 v7 SEMOD53385-1 v1

Table 178. Case

Material Steel sheet

Front plate Stainless steel with cut-out for HMI

Surface treatment Aluzink preplated steel

Finish Light grey (RAL 7035)

M12327-1 v5

Table 179. Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529

Front IP40 (IP54 with sealing strip)

Sides, top and bottom IP40

Rear side IP20 with screw compression type

IP10 with ring lug terminals
M11777-1 v7

Table 180. Weight

Case size Weight

6U, 1/2 x 19” £ 7.5 kg/16 lb

6U, 3/4 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb

6U, 1/1 x 19” £ 15 kg/33 lb

Electrical safety
GUID-1CF5B10A-CF8B-407D-8D87-F4B48B43C2B2 v2 GUID-2825B541-DD31-4DAF-B5B3-97555F81A1C2 v1

Table 181. Electrical safety according to IEC 60255-27

Equipment class I (protective earthed)

Overvoltage category III

Pollution degree 2 (normally only non-conductive pollution occurs except that occasionally a temporary conductivity caused by
condensation is to be expected)

Connection system
SEMOD53376-2 v6 SEMOD53371-1 v1

Table 182. CT and VT circuit connectors

Connector type Rated voltage and current Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)

2 x 2.5 mm2 (2 x AWG14)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 250 V AC, 20 A 4 mm2 (AWG12)
M12583-1 v8

Table 183. Auxiliary power supply and binary I/O connectors

Connector type Rated voltage Maximum conductor area

Screw compression type 250 V AC 2.5 mm2 (AWG14)

2 × 1 mm2 (2 x AWG18)

Terminal blocks suitable for ring lug terminals 300 V AC 3 mm2 (AWG14)

140 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-96676D5D-0835-44DA-BC22-058FD18BDF34 v3

Because of limitations of space, when

ring lug terminal is ordered for Binary
I/O connections, one blank slot is
necessary between two adjacent I/O
modules. Please refer to the ordering
particulars for details.

Table 184. NUM: Communication ports

NUM 4 Ethernet ports

1 Basic, 3 Optional

Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45

Carrier modules supported OEM, LDCM

GUID-4876834C-CABB-400B-B84B-215F65D8AF92 v3

Table 185. OEM: Number of Ethernet ports

OEM 2 Ethernet Ports

Ethernet connection type SFP Optical LC or Galvanic RJ45

ABB 141
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Basic IED functions M11963-1 v5

Table 186. Self supervision with internal event list

Data Value

Recording manner Continuous, event controlled

List size 40 events, first in-first out

M12331-1 v9

Table 187. Time synchronization, time tagging

Function Value

Time tagging accuracy of the synchrophasor data ± 1 µs

Time tagging resolution, events and sampled measurement values 1 ms

Time tagging error with synchronization once/min (minute pulse synchronization), events and sampled ± 1.0 ms typically
measurement values

Time tagging error with SNTP synchronization, sampled measurement values ± 1.0 ms typically
GUID-8AEB81D0-1731-46DF-A206-D2E758823575 v2

Table 188. Time synchronization PTP: IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Supported types of clock Boundary Clock (BC), Ordinary Clock (OC), Transparent Clock (TC)

Accuracy According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Number of nodes According to standard IEC/IEEE 61850-9-3

Ports supported All rear Ethernet ports

SEMOD55660-2 v3

Table 189. GPS time synchronization module (GTM)

Function Range or value Accuracy

Receiver – ±1µs relative UTC

Time to reliable time reference with antenna in new <30 minutes –

position or after power loss longer than 1 month

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <15 minutes –

longer than 48 hours

Time to reliable time reference after a power loss <5 minutes –

shorter than 48 hours
SEMOD55693-2 v5

Table 190. GPS – Antenna and cable

Function Value

Max antenna cable attenuation 26 db @ 1.6 GHz

Antenna cable impedance 50 ohm

Lightning protection Must be provided externally

Antenna cable connector SMA in receiver end

TNC in antenna end

Accuracy +/-1μs

142 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD141136-2 v10

Table 191. IRIG-B

Quantity Rated value

Number of channels IRIG-B 1

Number of optical channels 1

Electrical connector:

Electrical connector IRIG-B BNC

Pulse-width modulated 5 Vpp

Amplitude modulated
– low level 1-3 Vpp
– high level 3 x low level, max 9 Vpp

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x, IRIG-B 12x

Accuracy +/-10μs for IRIG-B 00x and +/-100μs for IRIG-B 12x

Input impedance 100 k ohm

Optical connector:

Optical connector IRIG-B Type ST

Type of fiber 62.5/125 μm multimode fiber

Supported formats IRIG-B 00x

Accuracy +/- 1μs

ABB 143
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Inverse characteristic M12388-1 v23

Table 192. ANSI Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±2.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 193. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

±5.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

144 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 194. IEC Inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characteristn =

Reserved (where, n = 1 - 4) shall not be
used, since this parameter setting is
for future use and not implemented
yet.

ABB 145
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 195. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%

or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 196. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±2.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

146 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 197. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 1.10 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%

or ±40 ms whichever is
1 greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset
GUID-771E5218-2913-4BB0-B1EE-2CA1E912AEAA v1

Table 198. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential Protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±

5.0% or ± 40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

ABB 147
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 199. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

The parameter setting Characterist1

and 4/Reserved shall not be used, since
this parameter setting is for future use
and not implemented yet.

Table 200. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Line Differential protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01 IEC 60255-151, ± 5.0%

or ± 40 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse k = (0.05-999) in steps of 0.01

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

148 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-19F8E187-4ED0-48C3-92F6-0D9EAA2B39BB v4

Table 201. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 ,

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset ±5.0% or ±160 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

ABB 149
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 202. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
æ A ö is greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

Programmable characteristic k = (0.05-2.00) in steps of 0.01

Operate characteristic: A=(0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
B=(0.00-20.00) in steps of 0.01
æ A ö C=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
t = ç P + B÷ × k P=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001
ç (I - C ) ÷
è ø TR=(0.005-100.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1370-SMALL V1 EN-US CR=(0.1-10.0) in steps of 0.1
Reset characteristic: PR=(0.005-3.000) in steps of 0.001

TR
t = ×k
(I PR
- CR )
EQUATION1253-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

Table 203. RI and RD type inverse time characteristics for Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

RI type inverse characteristic 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 2.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%

1.5 x Iset ≤ I ≤ 20 x Iset or ±160 ms whichever
1 is greater
t = ×k
0.236
0.339 -
I
EQUATION1137-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

RD type logarithmic inverse

characteristic

æ I ö
t = 5.8 - ç 1.35 × In ÷
è k ø
EQUATION1138-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

150 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

GUID-2AE8C92E-5DA8-487F-927D-8E553EE29240 v2

Table 204. ANSI Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 ANSI/IEEE C37.112 , ±

5.0% or ±40 ms
æ A ö whichever is greater
t =ç P + B÷×k
è (
ç I -1 ÷
ø )
EQUATION1249-SMALL V3 EN-US

Reset characteristic:

tr
t = ×k
(I 2
-1 )
EQUATION1250-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

ANSI Extremely Inverse A=28.2, B=0.1217, P=2.0 , tr=29.1

ANSI Very inverse A=19.61, B=0.491, P=2.0 , tr=21.6

ANSI Normal Inverse A=0.0086, B=0.0185, P=0.02, tr=0.46

ANSI Moderately Inverse A=0.0515, B=0.1140, P=0.02, tr=4.85

ANSI Long Time Extremely Inverse A=64.07, B=0.250, P=2.0, tr=30

ANSI Long Time Very Inverse A=28.55, B=0.712, P=2.0, tr=13.46

ANSI Long Time Inverse A=0.086, B=0.185, P=0.02, tr=4.6

Table 205. IEC Inverse time characteristics for Voltage restrained time overcurrent protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Operating characteristic: 0.05 ≤ k ≤ 999.00 IEC 60255-151, ±5.0%

or ±40 ms whichever is
æ A ö greater
t = ç P ÷×k
ç ( I - 1) ÷
è ø
EQUATION1251-SMALL V1 EN-US

I = Imeasured/Iset

IEC Normal Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Very inverse A=13.5, P=1.0

IEC Inverse A=0.14, P=0.02

IEC Extremely inverse A=80.0, P=2.0

IEC Short time inverse A=0.05, P=0.04

IEC Long time inverse A=120, P=1.0

ABB 151
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

SEMOD116978-2 v10

Table 206. Inverse time characteristics for overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

whichever is greater
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k  480
t 2.0
 0.035
 U  Un  
 32   0.5 
 Un  

IECEQUATION2423 V2 EN-US

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t= 3.0
+ 0.035
æ U - Un > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U> ø
IECEQUATION2421 V1 EN-US

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
k×A B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
t = +D C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
P
æB × U - U > ö D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ç -C÷
è U > ø P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US

152 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 207. Inverse time characteristics for undervoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01 ±5.0% or ±45 ms

whichever is greater
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
EQUATION1431-SMALL V1 EN-US

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

k × 480
t = + 0.055
2.0
æ 32 × U < -U - 0.5 ö
ç ÷
è U < ø
EQUATION1432-SMALL V1 EN-US

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of 0.01

A = (0.005-200.000) in steps of 0.001
é ù B = (0.50-100.00) in steps of 0.01
ê k×A
ú C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of 0.1
t =ê ú+D D = (0.000-60.000) in steps of 0.001
ê æ U < -U ö
P
ú P = (0.000-3.000) in steps of 0.001
êçB × -C÷ ú
ëè U < ø û
EQUATION1433-SMALL V1 EN-US

U< = Uset
U = Umeasured

ABB 153
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 208. Inverse time characteristics for residual overvoltage protection

Function Range or value Accuracy

Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps ±5.0% or ±45 ms whichever is greater

of 0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
EQUATION1436-SMALL V1 EN-US

U> = Uset
U = Umeasured

Type B curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
2.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1437-SMALL V2 EN-US

Type C curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k ⋅ 480
t = + 0.035
3.0
 32 ⋅ U − U > − 0.5 
 
 U > 
EQUATION1438-SMALL V2 EN-US

Programmable curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps

of 0.01
k×A A = (0.005-200.000) in
t = +D steps of 0.001
P
æB × U - U > ö B = (0.50-100.00) in
ç -C÷
è U > ø steps of 0.01
EQUATION1439-SMALL V1 EN-US
C = (0.0-1.0) in steps of
0.1
D = (0.000-60.000) in
steps of 0.001
P = (0.000-3.000) in
steps of 0.001

154 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

26. Ordering for customized IED GUID-79B6B8D2-5EE1-4456-A767-5820B9FA61D7 v12

Table 209. General guidelines

Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.

Table 210. Example ordering code

To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the selection tables, as given in the example below.
The selected qty of each table must be filled in, if no selection is possible the code is 0
Example of a complete code: RED670*2.2 - F00X00 - A0000030211111110 - B52252552212521111111110000 - C3300132122020022221000300 - D22212011 -
E66600 - F4 - S6 - G232 - H20401000000 - K20201111 - L1100 - M0010222 - P11100000000000000 - B1X0 - AC -CA - B - A3X0 - CD1D1ARGN1N1XXXXXXX -
KKKXXHKKLAGXSY

Product definition - Differential protection -

RED670* 2.2 - F00 X0 - A 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
0

Impedance protection -
B 0 0 0 0 -

Current protection -
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0 -

Voltage protection - Frequency protection - Multipurpose - General -

protection calculation
D 0 1 - E 00 - F - S -

Secondary system supervision - Control -

G - H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -

Scheme - Logic - Monitoring - Station communication -

communication
K - L 0 - M 1 0 - P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 -
0

Language - Casing - Power - HMI - Analog system - Binary input/output -

and supply
mounting
B1 - - - - - -

Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization

K

Table 211. Product definition

RED670* 2.2 F00 X00

Table 212. Product definition ordering codes

Product RED670*
Product version 2.2
Configuration alternative
Line differential protection RED670 F00
ACT configuration
No ACT configuration downloaded X00
Ordering number
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK002810-AG

ABB 155
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 213. Differential protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
A 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 214. Differential functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
High impedance differential protection, single phase HZPDIF 1MRK005904-HB 6 00-03
Restricted earth fault protection, low impedance REFPDIF 1MRK005904-LC 8 0-2
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends L3CPDIF 1MRK005904-MC 9 0-1 Only one PDIF
must be
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends L6CPDIF 1MRK005904-NC 10 0-1
ordered.
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends, inzone LT3CPDIF 1MRK005904-PC 11 0-1 L4CPDIF
transformer requires line
Line differential protection for 6 CT sets, 3-5 line ends, inzone LT6CPDIF 1MRK005904-RC 12 0-1 data
transformer communicatio
n in 2Mbps
High speed line differential protection for 4 CT sets, 2-3 line L4CPDIF 1MRK005905-NB 13 0-1 mode.
ends
Line differential protection logic LDLPSCH 1MRK005904-SA 14 0-1 Required with
L3CPDIF,
L6CPDIF,
LT3CPDIF or
LT6CPDIF
Additional security logic for differential protection LDRGFC 1MRK005904-TA 15 0-1

Table 215. Impedance protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26
B 0 0 0 0

156 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 216. Impedance functions, alternatives

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
Note: One and only one alternative can be selected. Selected qty is 0 for other functions in an unselected alternative.
Alternative 1 Distance protection, quadrilateral
Distance protection zone, quadrilateral characteristic ZMQPDIS, 1MRK005907-AA 1 0-5
ZMQAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
angle
Alternative 2 Distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
angle
Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for ZMCPDIS, 1MRK005907-DA 4 0-5
series compensated lines ZMCAPDIS
Directional impedance quadrilateral, including series ZDSRDIR 1MRK005907-EA 5 0-2
compensation
Alternative 3 Distance protection, mho (mho for phase - phase fault and mho in parallel with quad for earth fault)
Full-scheme distance protection, mho characteristic ZMHPDIS 1MRK005907-FA 6 0-5
Full-scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for earth ZMMPDIS, 1MRK005907-GA 7 0-5
faults ZMMAPDIS
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Additional distance protection directional function for earth ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
faults
Mho impedance supervision logic ZSMGAPC 1MRK005907-LB 10 0-1
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Alternative 4 Distance protection, quadrilateral with separate settings for PP and PE
Directional impedance quadrilateral ZDRDIR 1MRK005907-BA 2 0-2
Distance measuring zone, quad characteristic separate Ph- ZMRPDIS, 1MRK005907-NA 12 0-5
Ph and Ph-E settings ZMRAPDIS
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with settable FRPSPDIS 1MRK005907-PA 13 0-2
angle
Alternative 5 High speed distance protection, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection, quad and mho ZMFPDIS 1MRK005907-SE 14 0-1
characteristic
Alternative 6 High speed distance protection for series compensated lines, quadrilateral and mho
High speed distance protection for series compensated ZMFCPDIS 1MRK005907-RE 15 0-1
lines, quadrilateral and mho characteristic
Optional for alternative 1
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic ZDMRDIR 1MRK005907-HA 8 0-2
Optional for alternative 3
Phase selection, quadrilateral characteristic with fixed FDPSPDIS 1MRK005907-CA 3 0-2
angle
Optional for alternatives 1, 2 and 4
Additional distance protection directional function for earth ZDARDIR 1MRK005907-KA 9 0-2
faults
Faulty phase identification with load encroachment FMPSPDIS 1MRK005907-MA 11 0-2
Optional for alternatives 1, 2, 3 and 4
Phase preference logic PPLPHIZ 1MRK005908-DB 16 0-1
Optional for alternatives 5 and 6
Phase preference logic PPL2PHIZ 1MRK005908-DC 17 0-1
Optional with any alternatives
Power swing detection ZMRPSB 1MRK005907-UA 18 0-1
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current ZCVPSOF 1MRK005908-AA 19 0-1
based
Power swing logic PSLPSCH 1MRK005907-VA 20 0-1
PoleSlip/Out-of-step protection PSPPPAM 1MRK005908-CB 21 0-1
Out-of-step protection OOSPPAM 1MRK005908-GA 22 0-1

ABB 157
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 217. Current protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23
C 00 0 00 1 0 0 0 0 0

Table 218. Current functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
Instantaneous phase overcurrent protection PHPIOC 1MRK005910-AD 1 0-3
Directional phase overcurrent protection, four steps OC4PTOC 1MRK005910-BC 2 0-3
Instantaneous residual overcurrent protection EFPIOC 1MRK005910-DD 4 0-1
Directional residual overcurrent protection, four steps EF4PTOC 1MRK005910-EE 5 0-3
Four step directional negative phase sequence overcurrent NS4PTOC 1MRK005910-FB 6 0-2
protection
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power SDEPSDE 1MRK005910-GA 7 0-1
protection
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Celsius LCPTTR 1MRK005911-BA 8 0-2
Thermal overload protection, one time constant, Fahrenheit LFPTTR 1MRK005911-AA 9 0-2
Breaker failure protection CCRBRF 1MRK005910-LC 11 0-2
Stub protection STBPTOC 1MRK005910-NC 13 0-2
Pole discordance protection CCPDSC 1MRK005910-PA 14 0-2
Directional underpower protection GUPPDUP 1MRK005910-RA 15 0-2
Directional overpower protection GOPPDOP 1MRK005910-TA 16 0-2
Broken conductor check BRCPTOC 1MRK005910-SA 17 1
Voltage restrained overcurrent protection VRPVOC 1MRK005910-XA 21 0-3

Table 219. Voltage protection

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
D 0 1

Table 220. Voltage functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
Two step undervoltage protection UV2PTUV 1MRK005912-AA 1 0-2
Two step overvoltage protection OV2PTOV 1MRK005912-BA 2 0-2
Two step residual overvoltage protection ROV2PTOV 1MRK005912-CC 3 0-2
Overexcitation protection OEXPVPH 1MRK005912-DA 4 0-1
Voltage differential protection VDCPTOV 1MRK005912-EA 5 0-2
Loss of voltage check LOVPTUV 1MRK005912-GA 7 1
Radial feeder protection PAPGAPC 1MRK005912-HA 8 0-1

Table 221. Frequency protection

Position 1 2 3 4
E 00

Table 222. Frequency functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
Underfrequency protection SAPTUF 1MRK005914-AC 1 0-6
Overfrequency protection SAPTOF 1MRK005914-BB 2 0-6
Rate-of-change of frequency protection SAPFRC 1MRK005914-CB 3 0-6

Table 223. Multipurpose protection

Position 1
F

158 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 224. Multipurpose functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
General current and voltage protection CVGAPC 1MRK005915-AA 1 0-4

Table 225. General calculation

Position 1
S

Table 226. General calculation functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
Multipurpose filter SMAIHPAC 1MRK005915-KB 1 0-6

Table 227. Secondary system supervision

Position 1 2 3
G

Table 228. Secondary system supervision functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
Current circuit supervision CCSSPVC 1MRK005916-AC 1 0-2
Fuse failure supervision FUFSPVC 1MRK005916-BA 2 0-3
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference VDSPVC 1MRK005916-CA 3 0-2

Table 229. Control

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11
H 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

Table 230. Control functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
Synchrocheck, energizing check and synchronizing SESRSYN 1MRK005917-AC 1 0-2
Autorecloser SMBRREC 1MRK005917-BC 3 0-4
Control functionality for a single bay, max 10 objects (1CB), APC10 1MRK005917-AZ 5 0-1 Only one APC
including interlocking type can be
ordered.
Control functionality for a single bay, max 15 objects (2CB), APC15 1MRK005917-BZ 6 0-1
including interlocking

Table 231. Scheme communication

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
K

ABB 159
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 232. Scheme communication functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and

identification qty qty rules
Scheme communication logic with delta based blocking ZCPSCH 1MRK005920-AA 1 0-2 Only one of
scheme signal transmit ZCPSCH/
ZC1PPSCH can
Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance ZC1PPSCH 1MRK005920-BA 2 0-2
be selected.
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance ZCRWPSCH 1MRK005920-CA 3 0-2 Only one of
protection ZCRWPSCH/
ZC1WPSCH can
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase ZC1WPSCH 1MRK005920-DA 4 0-2
be selected.
segregated communication
Local acceleration logic ZCLCPSCH 1MRK005920-EA 5 0-1
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent ECPSCH 1MRK005920-FA 6 0-1
protection
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual ECRWPSCH 1MRK005920-GA 7 0-1
overcurrent protection
Direct transfer trip DTT 1MRK005921-AX 8 0-1

Table 233. Logic

Position 1 2 3
L 00

Table 234. Logic functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
Configurable logic blocks Q/T 1MRK005922-MX 1 0-1
Extension logic package 1MRK005922-DA 2 0-1

Table 235. Monitoring

Position 1 2 3 4
M 1 0

Table 236. Monitoring functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
Circuit breaker condition monitoring SSCBR 1MRK005924-HA 1 00-06
Fault locator LMBRFLO 1MRK005925-XB 2 1
Through fault monitoring PTRSTHR 1MRK005924-TA 4 0–2
Current harmonic monitoring, 3 phase CHMMHAI 1MRK005924-QA 5 0–3
Voltage harmonic monitoring, 3 phase VHMMHAI 1MRK005924-SA 6 0–3

Table 237. Station communication

Position 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17
P 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0

160 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 238. Station communication functions

Function Function Ordering no Position Available Selected Notes and rules

identification qty qty
IEC61850-9-2 Process bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK005933-HA 1 0-1
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol PRP 1MRK005932-FA 2 0-1 PRP and HSR
require two
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy HSR 1MRK005932-NA 3 0-1
SFPs placed in
pairs.
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK005933-DA 15 0-1 This
functionality
requires
accurate time
synchronization,
therefore either
‘Precision Time
Protocol (PTP)
Time synch or
GTM or IRIG-B
will be required.

Table 239. Language selection

Language Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0 Additional 2nd languages are
continuously being added.
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12
Please get in touch with local
ABB sales contact.
Selected B1

Table 240. Casing selection

Casing Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selected

Table 241. Mounting selection

Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not
recommended with
communication modules with
fiber connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selected

Table 242. Power supply module selection

Power supply module Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selected

ABB 161
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 243. Human machine interface selection

Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selected

Table 244. Analog system selection

Analog system Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)

P40/X401

P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CG A1 A1
TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-CH A2 A2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3 A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4 A4
First TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-BK A5 A5
First TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6
First TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
First TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DG A8 A8 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-DH A9 A9 Maximum qty = 1
First TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AP A12 A12
First TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AR A13 A13
First TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AU A14 A14
First TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AV A15 A15
First TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16
First TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EA A17 A17
First TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz 1MRK002247-EB A18 A18
TRM 12I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CC B1 B1
TRM 12I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-CD B2 B2
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3 B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4 B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5 B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8 B8 Maximum qty = 1
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9 B9 Maximum qty = 1
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12 B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13 B13
TRM 6I 5A + 1I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AX B14 B14
TRM 3I 5A + 4I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AY B15 B15
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16
TRM 3IM 1A + 4IP 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-EC B17 B17
TRM 3IM 5A + 4IP 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-ED B18 B18
Selected

162 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 245. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with compression terminals

When ordering I/O modules, observe the maximum quantities according to the tables below.

Note: Standard order of location for I/O modules is BIM-BOM-SOM-IOM-MIM from left to right as seen from the rear side of the IED, but
can also be freely placed.
Note: The maximum quantity of I/O modules depends on the type of connection terminals.
Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 14 6 4 4 14 *)
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 11 6 4 4 11 *)
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 8 6 4 4 8 *)
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 *)
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 3 3 3 1 3
one (1) TRM
*) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM

Table 246. Maximum quantity of I/O modules, with ringlug terminals

Note: Only every second slot can be used.

Case sizes BIM IOM BOM/ MIM Maximum in case
SOM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 7 6 4 4 7 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11, P13, P15
one (1) TRM
1/1 x 19” rack casing, 5 5 4 4 5 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9, P11
two (2) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 4 4 4 4 4 **) possible locations: P3, P5, P7, P9
one (1) TRM
3/4 x 19” rack casing, 2 2 2 2 2, possible locations: P3, P5
two (2) TRM
1/2 x 19” rack casing, 1 1 1 1 1, possible location: P3
one (1) TRM
**) including a combination of maximum four modules of type BOM, SOM and MIM

ABB 163
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 247. Binary input/output module selection

Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

output modules
Slot position

P3/X31

P4/X41

P5/X51

P6/X61

P7/X71

P8/X81

P9/X91

P10/X101

P11/X111

P12/X121

P13/X131

P14/X141

P15/X151

P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)

1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ These black marks

TRM indicate the maximum
number of modules
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
per casing type and
TRM
the slots that can be
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ occupied.
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
Ringlug 1MRK002960-LA R Only every second slot
terminals can be used; see Table
246
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A A
module 24
output relays
(BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA

164 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 247. Binary input/output module selection, continued

Binary input/ Ordering no Selection Notes and rules
output modules
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R R R
module MIM 6
channels
SOM Static 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM must not be
output module, placed in the following
12 outputs; 6 positions: 1/2 case slot
standard relays P5, 3/4 case 1 TRM slot
+ 6 static P10, 3/4 case 2 TRM
outputs, slot P7, 1/1 case 2 TRM
48-60VDC slot P13, 1/1 case, 1
TRM slot P16.
SOM Static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
output module,
12 outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static
outputs,
110-250VDC
Selected

ABB 165
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Table 248. Station communication, remote end serial communication and time synchronization selection

Station communication, remote end Ordering no Selection Notes and rules

serial communication and time
synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear The maximum number

P30:1/X301

P30:2/X302

P30:3/X303

P30:4/X304

P30:5/X305

P30:6/X306

P30:6:1/X3061

P30:6:2/X3062

P31:1/X311

P31:2/X312

P31:3/X313

P32:2/X322

P32:3/X323

LDCM mode
view) and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication
modules in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ Max 2 LDCM in 1/2
case with 1 TRM case
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
with 2 TRM
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Ethernet SFP is basic
in P30:1. P30:6:1 and
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P
P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet
module in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-AB L
60870-5-103 plastic interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-BB M
60870-5-103 plastic/glass
interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 1MRK001608-CB N
60870-5-103 glass interface
Galvanic RS485 communication 1MRK002309-AA G G G
module
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A Max 4 LDCMs can be
ordered. Always place
Optical medium range LDCM, 1310 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
LDCM modules on the
nm
same board to support
Optical long range LDCM, 1550 nm 1MRK002311-BA C C C C C C redundant
Galvanic X21 line data 1MRK002307-AA E E E E communication: in
communication module P30:5 and P30:6, P31:2
and P31:3 or P32:2 and
P32:3.
Line data communication, default — X
64kbps mode
Allow line data communication in 1MRK007002-AA Y
2Mbps mode
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
module, with PPS
Selected

166 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

27. Ordering for pre-configured IED GUID-0B941090-4C75-45EE-A406-B7A938251673 v16

Guidelines
Carefully read and follow the set of rules to ensure problem-free order management.
Please refer to the available functions table for included application functions.
PCM600 can be used to make changes and/or additions to the delivered factory configuration of the pre-configured.

To obtain the complete ordering code, please combine code from the tables, as given in the example below.
Example code: RED670 *2.2-B33X00- A02H04-B1X0-AC-CA-B-A3X0-CDAB1RGN1N1XXXXXXX-KKKKXHKKLAGFSX. Using the code of each position #1-11
specified as RED670*1-2 2-3 3 3 3 3 3-4 4-5 6-7 7-8-9 9 9 9-10 10 10 10 10 10 10 10-11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11 11
Product version Configuration Software options
alternatives
# 1 - 2 - 3 -
RED670* 2.2 - - -

Language Casing and Mounting Power supply HMI Analog system

4 - 5 6 - 7 - 8 - 9 -
- - - - -

Binary input/output modules Station communication, remote end serial communication and time
synchronization
10 - 11
-

Position
Product version #1 Notes and rules
Version no. 2.2
Selection for position #1 2.2

Configuration alternatives Ordering no #2 Notes and rules

Line differential protection, Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-5 line ends 1MRK004810-FG B33
Line differential protection, Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004810-GG A42
Line differential protection, Multi breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004810-HG B42
Line differential protection, Single breaker, 1/3 phase tripping, with distance 1MRK004810-KG C42
protection
ACT configuration
ABB standard configuration X00
Selection for
position #2

ABB 167
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Software options Ordering no #3 Notes and rules

No option X00 All fields in the ordering form
do not need to be filled in.
High impedance differential protection - 3 blocks 1MRK004001-AB A02
Line differential protection 6 CT sets 1MRK004001-AD A04 Only one Line differential
protection has to be selected.
Line differential protection 6 CT sets + transformer 1MRK004001-AF A06
A04, A06 and A34 only for B33
Line differential protection for 3 CT sets, 2-3 line ends 1MRK004001-AU A34
Phase segregated scheme communication 1MRK004001-BE B05
High speed distance protection, quad and mho characteristic 1MRK004001-VF B15 Only for B33/A42/B42
Out-of-step protection 1MRK004001-BW B22 Only for B33/A42/ B42
Pole slip protection 1MRK004001-VU B24 Only for C42
Stub protection 1MRK004001-VK B27 Only for B33/B42; 1 block
included as basic
Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection 1MRK004001-CT C16
Scheme communication for residual overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VN C34 Only for B33/A42/B42
Directional power and voltage restrained overcurrent protection 1MRK004001-VL C35
Overexcitation protection - 2 winding 1MRK004001-DC D03
Frequency protection - line 1MRK004001-ED E04 1 block already included
General current and voltage protection 1MRK004001-FA F01
Fuse failure supervision based on voltage difference 1MRK004001-HC G03
Autorecloser, 1 circuit breaker 1MRK004001-GD H04 Only for A42/C42, 1 block
already included
Autorecloser, 2 circuit breakers 1MRK004001-GE H05 Only for B33/B42, 2 blocks
already included
Control functionality for up to 10 objects 1MRK004001-GW H37 H37 only for A42/C42, H38 only
for B33/B42
Control functionality for up to 15 objects 1MRK004001-GY H38
Through fault monitoring 1MRK004001-KR M22
Harmonic monitoring 1MRK004001-KS M23
IEC 62439-3 Parallel redundancy protocol 1MRK004001-PP P23 Options P23 and P24 require
two SFPs placed in pairs.
IEC 62439-3 High-availability seamless redundancy 1MRK004001-PR P24
IEC 61850-9-2 Process Bus communication, 8 merging units 1MRK004001-PT P30
Synchrophasor report, 8 phasors 1MRK004001-PV P32 This functionality requires
accurate time synchronization,
therefore either Precision Time
Protocol (PTP) Time synch or
GTM or IRIG-B will be required.
Selection for
position #3

Language Ordering no #4 Notes and rules

First local HMI user dialogue language
HMI language, English IEC 1MRK002930-AA B1
Additional local HMI user dialogue language
No additional HMI language X0
HMI language, English US 1MRK002920-UB A12 Additional 2nd languages are
continuously being added.
Please get in touch with local
ABB sales contact.
Selection for B1
position #4

Casing Ordering no #5 Notes and rules

1/2 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VA A
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VB B
3/4 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VE C
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 1 TRM 1MRK000151-VC D
1/1 x 19" rack casing, 2 TRM 1MRK000151-VD E
Selection for
position #5

168 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Mounting details with IP40 of protection from the front Ordering no #6 Notes and rules
No mounting kit included X
19" rack mounting kit for 1/2 x 19" case or 2xRHGS6 or RHGS12 1MRK002420-BB A
19" rack mounting kit for 3/4 x 19" case or 3xRHGS6 1MRK002420-BA B
19" rack mounting kit for 1/1 x 19" case 1MRK002420-CA C
Wall mounting kit 1MRK002420-DA D Wall mounting not
recommended with
communication modules with
fiber connection
Flush mounting kit 1MRK002420-PA E
Flush mounting kit + IP54 mounting seal 1MRK002420-NA F
Selection for
position #6

Power supply modules Ordering no #7 Notes and rules

Compression terminals 1MRK002960-GA C
Ringlug terminals 1MRK002960-HA R
Power supply module, 24-60 VDC 1MRK002239-AB A
Power supply module, 90-250 VDC 1MRK002239-BB B
Selection for
position #7

Human machine hardware interface Case size Ordering no #8 Notes and rules
Medium size - graphic display, IEC keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", IEC 1MRK000028-AA B
3/4 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-CA
1/1 x 19”, IEC 1MRK000028-BA
Medium size - graphic display, ANSI keypad symbols 1/2 x 19", ANSI 1MRK000028-AB C
3/4 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-CB
1/1 x 19”, ANSI 1MRK000028-BB
Selection for
position #8

ABB 169
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Analog system Ordering no #9 Notes and rules

When more than one TRM is selected, the connector type on both TRMs must be the same (A compression or B ring lug).
Slot position (front view/rear view)

P40/X401

P41/X411
No Transformer input module included X0 X0 Only valid if IEC 61850-9-2
Process bus communication is
selected.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BG A3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BH A4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-BK A5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AG A6 A6 Second TRM is optional.
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AH A7 A7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DG A8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-DH A9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AP A12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AR A13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, compression terminals 1MRK002247-AE A16 A16 Only for A42/C42. Second TRM
is optional.
TRM 9I 1A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BC B3
TRM 9I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BD B4
TRM 5I 1A + 4I 5A + 3U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-BF B5
TRM 6I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AC B6 B6 Second TRM is optional.
TRM 6I 5A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AD B7 B7
TRM 6I 1A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DC B8
TRM 6I 5A, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-DD B9
TRM 7I 1A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AS B12
TRM 7I 5A + 5U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AT B13
TRM 3I 5A + 3I 1A + 6U 110/220V, 50/60Hz, ring lug terminals 1MRK002247-AF B16 B16 Only for A42/C42. Second TRM
is optional.
Selection for
position #9

170 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
Slot position

P3/X31

P4/X41

P5/X51

P6/X61

P7/X71

P8/X81

P9/X91

P10/X101

P11/X111

P12/X121

P13/X131

P14/X141

P15/X151

P16/X161
(front view/rear
view)

1/2 case with 1 █ █ █ These black marks

TRM indicate the maximum
number of modules
3/4 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
per casing type and
TRM
the slots that can be
3/4 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ occupied.
TRM
1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
1/1 case with 2 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
TRM
Compression 1MRK002960-KA C
terminals
No board in slot X X X X X X X X X X X X
Binary output 1MRK000614-AB A A A A A A A A A A A A A Maximum 4 (BOM
module 24 +SOM+MIM) boards.
output relays
(BOM)
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-DD B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1 B1
RL24, 24-30VDC,
5mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-AD C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1 C1
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-BD D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1 D1
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CD E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1 E1
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-CE E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2 E2
RL220,
220-250VDC,
120mA
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-HA F F F F F F F F F F F F
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-EA G G G G G G G G G G G G
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-FA H H H H H H H H H H H H
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
BIM 16 inputs, 1MRK000508-GA K K K K K K K K K K K K
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA, enhanced
pulse counting
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-GD L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1 L1
10+2 outputs,
RL24, 24-30VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-AE M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1 M1
10+2 outputs,
RL48, 48-60VDC,
50mA

ABB 171
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Binary input/ Ordering no #10 Notes and rules

output modules
For pulse counting, for example kWh metering, the BIM with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must be used.
Note: 1 BIM required in position P3 and 1 BOM required in position P4.
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-BE N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1 N1
10+2 outputs,
RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs, 1MRK000173-CE P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1 P1
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
IOM 8 inputs 1MRK000173-CF P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2 P2
10+2 outputs,
RL220,
220-250VDC,
110mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-GC U U U U U U U U U U U U
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL24,
24-30VDC, 50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-AD V V V V V V V V V V V V
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL48,
48-60VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-BD W W W W W W W W W W W W
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL110,
110-125VDC,
50mA
IOM with MOV 8 1MRK000173-CD Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y Y
inputs, 10+2
outputs, RL220,
220-250VDC,
50mA
mA input 1MRK000284-AB R R R R R R R R R R R R maximum 1 MIM board
module MIM 6 in 1/2 case
channels
SOM Static 1MRK002614-BA T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 T1 SOM must not to be
output module, placed in position
12 outputs; 6 nearest to NUM: 1/2
standard relays case slot P5, 3/4 case 1
+ 6 static TRM slot P10, 3/4 case
outputs, 2 TRM slot P7, 1/1 case
48-60VDC 2 TRM slot P13, 1/1
case, 1 TRM slot P16.
SOM Static 1MRK002614-CA T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2 T2
output module,
12 outputs; 6
standard relays
+ 6 static
outputs,
110-250VDC
Selection for C
position #10

172 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Station communication, remote end serial Ordering no #11 Notes and rules
communication and time synchronization
Slot position (front view/rear view) The maximum number

P30:1/X301

P30:2/X302

P30:3/X303

P30:4/X304

P30:5/X305

P30:6/X306

P30:6:1/X3061

P30:6:2/X3062

P31:1/X311

P31:2/X312

P31:3/X313
P32:2/X322
P32:3/X323

LDCM mode
and type of LDCM
modules supported
depend on the total
amount of I/O and
communication
modules in the IED.
Available slots in 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 case with 1 █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ Max 2 LDCM in 1/2
TRM case
Available slots in 3/4 and 1/1 case with 2 TRM █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █ █
No communication board included X X X X X X X X X X X
Ethernet SFP, optical LC connector 1MRK005500-AA K K K K K K Ethernet SFP is basic
in P30:1. P30:6:1 and
Ethernet SFP, RJ45 connector 1MRK005500-BA P P P P P P
P30:6:2 require the
Optical Ethernet
module in P30:6.
Optical Ethernet module 1MRK002266-EA H When OEM is ordered
in combination with 2
or 4 LDCMs in
redundant mode, it is
required to order RED
as a customized
product.
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic 1MRK001608-AB L
interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 plastic/ 1MRK001608-BB M
glass interface
Serial SPA/LON/DNP/IEC 60870-5-103 glass 1MRK001608-CB N
interface
Galvanic RS485 communication module 1MRK002309-AA G G G
Optical short range LDCM 1MRK002122-AB A A A A A A For RED670 A42, B42
and C42, one LDCM is
Optical medium range, LDCM 1310 nm 1MRK002311-AA B B B B B B
required in P30:5.
Optical long range, LDCM 1550 nm C C C C C C For RED670 B33, two
LDCMs are required in
P30:5 and P31:2.
Max 4 LDCMs can be
ordered. Always place
LDCM modules on the
same board to support
redundant
communication: P30:5,
P30:6, P31:2, P31:3 or
P32:2 and P32:3.
Line data communication, default 64kbps — X For A42/B42/D42, only
mode 2Mbps is allowed. For
B33, select either
Allow line data communication in 2Mbps mode 1MRK007002-AA Y
64kbps or 2Mbps;
default is 64kbps.
GPS time module 1MRK002282-AB S S S S
IRIG-B time synchronization module, with PPS 1MRK002305-AA F F F F
Selection for
position #11

ABB 173
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

28. Ordering for Accessories

Accessories IP15151-1 v1
GPS antenna and mounting details
M12374-3 v5

GPS antenna, including mounting kits Quantity: 1MRK 001 640-AA

Cable for antenna, 20 m (Appx. 65 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-AA

Cable for antenna, 40 m (Appx. 131 ft) Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-BA

Interface converter (for remote end data communication)

M16668-3 v9

External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps) to G703 Quantity 1 2 3 4

1MRK 002 245-AA
:

External interface converter from C37.94 (64kbps/2Mbps) to G703.E1 Quantity 1 2 3 4

1MRK 002 245-BA
:

Test switch Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal

SEMOD111888-5 v12
The test system COMBITEST intended for use with the neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-
IEDs is described in 1MRK 512 001-BEN and 1MRK BE).
001024-CA. Please refer to the website:
www.abb.com/protection-control for detailed Multi-breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external
information. neutral on current circuit (ordering number RK926 315-
BV).
Due to the high flexibility of our product and the wide
variety of applications possible the test switches needs The normally open "In test mode" contact 29-30 on the
to be selected for each specific application. RTXP test switches should be connected to the input of
the test function block to allow activation of functions
Select your suitable test switch base on the available individually during testing.
contacts arrangements shown in the reference
documentation. Test switches type RTXP 24 is ordered separately. Please
refer to Section Related documents for references to
However our proposals for suitable variants are; corresponding documents.

Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with internal RHGS 6 Case or RHGS 12 Case with mounted RTXP 24
neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315- and the on/off switch for dc-supply are ordered
AK). separately. Please refer to Section Related documents
for references to corresponding documents.
Single breaker/Single or Three Phase trip with external
neutral on current circuits (ordering number RK926 315-
AC).

174 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Protection cover
M15040-3 v7

Protective cover for rear side of RHGS6, 6U, 1/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-AE

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/2 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-TA

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 3/4 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-SA

Protective cover for rear side of terminal, 6U, 1/1 x 19” Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-RA

External resistor unit

SEMOD120228-4 v8

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, Quantity 1 2 3
RK 795 101-MA
1ph :

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor 20-100V, Quantity RK 795 101-MB
3ph :
High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor Quantity 1 2 3
RK 795 101-CB
100-400V, 1ph :

High impedance resistor unit with resistor and voltage dependent resistor Quantity RK 795 101-DC
100-400V, 3ph :

Combiflex
IP15161-1 v1

Key switch for settings SEMOD130356-4 v7

Key switch for lock-out of settings via LHMI Quantity: 1MRK 000 611-A

Note: To connect the key switch, leads with 10 A Combiflex socket on one end must be used.
SEMOD130267-5 v8

Mounting kit
Side-by-side mounting kit Quantity: 1MRK 002 420-Z

Configuration and monitoring tools

M15042-3 v5 IP15162-1 v2

Front connection cable between LHMI and PC Quantity: 1MRK 001 665-CA

SEMOD131414-4 v4

LED Label special paper A4, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-CA

LED Label special paper Letter, 1 pc Quantity: 1MRK 002 038-DA

Manuals M15161-3 v15

Note: One (1) IED Connect USB flash drive containing user documentation (Operation manual,
Technical manual, Installation manual, Commissioning manual, Application manual and Getting
started guide), Connectivity packages and LED label template is always included for each IED.

ABB 175
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

Rule: Specify additional quantity of IED Connect USB flash drive requested. Quantity: 1MRK 002 290-AE

176 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
 Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

User documentation
Rule: Specify the number of printed manuals requested
Application manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 376-UUS

Technical manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 377-UUS

Commissioning manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 378-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 505 378-UUS

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 392-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 393-UEN

Communication protocol manual, IEC 60870-5-103 IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 394-UEN

Communication protocol manual, LON IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 395-UEN

Communication protocol manual, SPA IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 396-UEN

Communication protocol ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 391-UUS

manual, DNP

Point list manual, DNP ANSI Quantity 1MRK 511 397-UUS

Operation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 500 127-UUS

Installation manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UEN

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 514 026-UUS

Engineering manual IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UEN

ABB 177
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
Line differential protection RED670 1MRK 505 379-BEN J
Version 2.2

ANSI Quantity: 1MRK 511 398-UUS

Cyber security deployment guideline IEC Quantity: 1MRK 511 399-UEN

Application guide, Communication set-up IEC Quantity: 1MRK 505 382-UEN

Reference information M2175-3 v4

For our reference and statistics we would be pleased to be provided with the following application data:

Country: End user:

Station name: Voltage level: kV

Related documents GUID-94E8A5CA-BE1B-45AF-81E7-5A41D34EE112 v7 670 series manuals Document numbers

Documents related to RED670 Document numbers Operation manual IEC:1MRK 500 127-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 500 127-UUS
Application manual IEC:1MRK 505 376-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 505 376-UUS Engineering manual IEC:1MRK 511 398-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 511 398-UUS
Commissioning manual IEC:1MRK 505 378-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 505 378-UUS Installation manual IEC:1MRK 514 026-UEN
ANSI:1MRK 514 026-UUS
Product guide 1MRK 505 379-BEN
Communication protocol 1MRK 511 391-UUS
Technical manual IEC:1MRK 505 377-UEN manual, DNP3
ANSI:1MRK 505 377-UUS
Communication protocol 1MRK 511 394-UEN
Type test certificate IEC:1MRK 505 379-TEN manual, IEC 60870-5-103
ANSI:1MRK 505 379-TUS
Communication protocol 1MRK 511 392-UEN
manual, IEC 61850 Edition 1

Communication protocol 1MRK 511 393-UEN

manual, IEC 61850 Edition 2

Communication protocol 1MRK 511 395-UEN

manual, LON

Communication protocol 1MRK 511 396-UEN

manual, SPA

Point list manual, DNP3 1MRK 511 397-UUS

Accessories guide IEC:1MRK 514 012-BEN

ANSI:1MRK 514 012-BUS

Cyber security deployment 1MRK 511 399-UEN

guideline

Connection and Installation 1MRK 513 003-BEN

components

Test system, COMBITEST 1MRK 512 001-BEN

Application guide, 1MRK 505 382-UEN

Communication set-up

178 ABB
© Copyright 2017 ABB. All rights reserved
179
ABB AB
Grid Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås, Sweden
Phone +46 (0) 21 32 50 00
Scan this QR code to visit our website
www.abb.com/protection-control
1MRK 505 379-BEN

© Copyright 2017 ABB.

All rights reserved.